JP6892906B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever is operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media, etc. can be mentioned.

Further, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, an assist time (hereinafter, "assist time"), which is a function of navigating the order of stop operations (hereinafter, may be referred to as a stop order) for displaying a specific combination of symbols with a lamp or the like. A gaming machine having a function (sometimes referred to as "AT") is known. Further, there is known a gaming machine having an "ART" function in which a replay time (hereinafter, may be referred to as "RT") and "AT", which are functions in which the replay probability is higher than usual, are generated at the same time. ing.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific combination (small combination related to "bell") is won in the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state), the number of ART games which is the remaining unit number of games in the game period of the "ART state". A game machine that performs an additional lottery is described.

JP-A-2015-91406

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, an additional lottery is performed near the closing time of the game store, and as a result, it is determined to add the number of ART games that clearly exceeds the number of unit games that can be played by the closing time. May occur. In this case, the player feels as if he / she has lost the number of indigestible (cannot play) ART games, and feels uncomfortable with the additional lottery that should be pleasing to the player, and the interest of the game is reduced for the player. There is a risk of doing so.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A start operation detection means (for example, a start switch 64 described later) for detecting a start operation by a player, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means.
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a stepping motor, which will be described later), which is composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displays a symbol according to the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch described later) that detects a stop operation for the plurality of display columns by the player, and
A stop control means (for example, a reel stop control process described later) that stops the variation display of the symbol according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means.
A notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device described later) that notifies the stop order, which is the order of stop operations for the plurality of display columns for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. 11 and speakers 20L, 20R, etc.)
It is possible to notify the stop order by the notification means, and a predetermined gaming state (for example, a second ART described later) that is advantageous to the player.
An extension determination means (for example, an additional lottery process (S583) during processing during ART, which will be described later) that makes an extension decision that is a determination relating to the extension of the predetermined gaming state during the predetermined gaming state.
An extension execution means capable of extending the predetermined gaming state according to the result of the extension determination (for example, an additional lottery process (S583) during processing during ART described later) and
In the predetermined gaming state, the extension determination suppressing means for suppressing the extension determination by the extension determination means (for example, S883 during processing at the time of receiving an input command described later) and
Predetermined information storage means (for example, additional cut flag storage area described later) capable of storing predetermined information (for example, on information of the additional cut flag described later) regarding suppression of the extension decision by the extension decision suppressing means, and
With
The extension decision suppressing means can suppress the extension decision in the next and subsequent games when an arbitrary selection is made by the player in the game and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, described later). S881-S884) during processing when receiving an input command,
The predetermined condition includes that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means and that the extension decision is made by the extension determination means.
The predetermined information is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is cleared when the gaming state is changed from the predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the enjoyment of gaming.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the front door is opened. It is a top view which shows the display device in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display device in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a general gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 2) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) for small combination / replay in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of a forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the gaming machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and RT transition in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the spilling bonus lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the G number addition lottery table in BB of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in BB of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR lottery table in BB of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR1 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR2 continuous lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition lottery table in BR of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition A of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for the additional addition B of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table for additional addition C of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (7) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (9) of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the provisional causal value lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-storage area of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing after the 2nd stop in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BR continuation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation determination in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value-related processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock effect control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the gaming machine in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a general gaming state in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) for small combination / replay in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table at the time of display in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order privilege lottery table in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the input command reception processing in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in 5th Embodiment of this invention.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing the first embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 118.
In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which a function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a game state higher than the normal time is operated, is activated at the same time will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. The main control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for this internal lottery means. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols) on the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along. Further, the reel stop control means is specified for one or more reels, for example, when the challenge bonus (CB) which is a second type special accessory and the middle bonus (MB) which continuously operates the CB are operated. Within the time of 75 msec (for one symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to the winning. The winning determination means is carried by the main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end portion of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying patterns drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed using the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4. The liquid crystal display device 11 shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

Hereinafter, the display window 4 is referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. These display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each region. In the present embodiment, the line connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R is used as a winning determination line (effective line) for determining whether or not to win. Define.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a decorative frame 100 having two panel openings 100a and 100b that expose the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 100. It has a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes the panel openings 100a and 100b.

The decorative frame 100 has a partition piece 112 that separates the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. The two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by partition pieces 112 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display portion 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The decorative frame 100 is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 21 and a movable decorative unit 121. The LED group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The movable decorative unit 121 is arranged on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decorative frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The movable decoration unit 121 lights up in a color and a light emitting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect or a predetermined effect is performed.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, select button) to be operated by the player. 29) is provided.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. The MAX bet button 14 shows a specific example of the first operation unit according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The start lever 16 shows a specific example of the second operation unit according to the gaming machine of the present invention. The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select an arbitrary item from a plurality of selectable items on various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the select button 29 is pressed, the position of the cursor for designating one of the displayed plurality of items and the highlighted item are changed. Further, the designated item is selected in response to the pressing of the enter button 28.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. indicate.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side open. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the stepping motor show a specific example of the variation display means according to the present invention.

A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. On the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided.

Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a. The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the cabinet 2a.

An auxiliary control board 42 constituting the auxiliary control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

Further, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46. This medal sensor shows a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 has a display unit 11a and a frame portion 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The display unit 11a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and has the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above. The frame portion 11b is formed in a rectangular frame shape surrounding the four sides of the display portion 11a.

A touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (the side opposite to the display window 4C). That is, the touch sensor module 31 is arranged at the lower right corner of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31.
As shown in FIG. 5, the touch sensor module 31 is a surface-type capacitance type touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed circuit board 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34.

The sensor unit 32 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate. The sensor unit 32 has a rectangular transparent substrate 35, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, a transparent conductive film, and a protective cover (not shown). Examples of the material of the transparent substrate 35 include glass. The protective cover is made of a transparent material and covers the transparent conductive film and the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c.

The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are arranged on the outer edge of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

The electrode pattern 36a is formed in an I shape and extends along one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36b is formed in an L shape and extends along one short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. Further, the electrode pattern 36c is formed in an L shape and extends along the other short side and the one long side of the transparent substrate 35. No electrode pattern is formed on the other long side of the transparent substrate 35. That is, no electrode pattern is formed on one side (the other long side) of the sensor unit 32.

The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7). The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. The touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed circuit board 33.

A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32, and when a finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. As a result, a weak current is generated in the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c, and the current value is output to the touch sensor IC34. The touch sensor IC34 detects the position touched by the finger based on the current values of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

As shown in FIG. 4, the portion of the electrode patterns 36b and 36c of the touch sensor module 31 along one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and the electrode pattern 36a face the right side piece of the frame portion 11b. Further, the portion of the electrode pattern 36b along one short side of the transparent substrate 35 faces the lower piece of the frame portion 11b.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of the front door 2b as viewed from the front.
As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed from the openings 100a and 100b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. As a result, a touch input unit 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is formed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a.

The electrode patterns 36a and 36b provided on one long side and one short side of the sensor portion 32 (see FIG. 4) of the touch sensor module 31 face the frame portion 11b and are covered with the front panel 10. .. Further, although the electrode pattern 36c does not face the frame portion 11b, it is covered with the front panel 10 (partition piece 112). An electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

As a result, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided can be made invisible to the player.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b.
The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. There is.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

An external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot 1.

A medal sensor 46S, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 67 are connected to the door relay terminal board 54. .. That is, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 67 are mainly connected via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the control board 41.

The medal sensor 46S detects that the medal has passed through the selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 24 and the 1BET button 25 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 26 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 shows a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 65. The stop switch is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that each of the stop buttons 27L, 27C, 27R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the replay is performed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 are electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 67. Further, the sub-control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 via the sub-relay board 67. ..

The sound I / O board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 21 showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 8), and displays the blinking pattern.

The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits the input information output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub-control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

The ROM cartridge board 76 and the liquid crystal relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 21), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and at predetermined positions of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 27L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 21, speakers 20L, 20R. Includes voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the sound from the LED. The liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the LED group 21 constitute an effect device according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 composed of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG. The touch sensor relay board 73 shows a specific example of the board for the second effect device according to the present invention.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151.
As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines the operation command and the XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and the XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67.

The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153, 154, regulators 155, 156, sub-control receive buffer 157, and sub-control transmit buffer 158. ..

A connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub-control reception buffer 157, and a sub-control transmission buffer 158 are connected to the touch sensor LSI 152. The sub-control receive buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub-control transmit buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub-relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control board 42 and the sub-relay board 67 show a specific example of the effect control board according to the present invention, and the sub-control circuit 101 shows a specific example of the effect control circuit according to the present invention. The connector 131 shows a specific example of the control side connector according to the present invention. The connector 153 mounted on the touch sensor relay board 73 shows a specific example of the second effect device side connector according to the present invention.

The regulator 155 controls the DC (direct current) 12V power supply supplied via the connector 153 to the DC 3.3V power supply, and outputs the DC (direct current) 12V power supply to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. Further, the regulator 156 controls the power supply of DC12V supplied via the connector 153 to the power supply of DC5V, and outputs the power supply to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

The sub-control receive buffer 157 temporarily stores the received data (RXD) transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101 and received by the connector 153. Then, the stored received data is transmitted to the touch sensor LSI 152.

The touch sensor LSI 152 has various operation commands indicating the type of operation for the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. To determine. Further, the XY coordinate data is determined based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, various operation commands and XY coordinate data are transmitted as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

In the present embodiment, since the touch sensor relay circuit determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor module, the processing related to the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub-control circuit 101 is reduced. Can be done. As a result, the burden on the sub-control circuit 101 when the touch sensor module 31 is mounted can be reduced.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 39.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 11). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, "0" to "20" corresponding to the symbol counters are set as symbol positions in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 11) with reference to the symbol position "0". Assigned to a symbol.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window 4. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4 have the symbol position "9" "9", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "watermelon", "red 7" at the symbol position "8", and "bell 1" at the symbol position "7" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, the display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the number of inserted medals is three and any one of "C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP" is determined (established) as the display combination, 13 medals will be paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the number of medals inserted is three and any one of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is determined (established) as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out. Is done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E", which are display roles related to replay (replay) as display roles, "C_HOM_A"-"C_HOM_P", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A"-"C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B", "C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A" , "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is determined (established), the replay (replay) is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the symbols of "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, "Rip" on the middle reel 3C, and "Rip" on the right reel 3R stop on the effective line, that is, "C_9_SEVN" as a display combination. When it is decided (established), nine medals will be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the symbols of "white 7"-"lip"-"lip" are stopped from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R on the effective line, that is, "C_ONE_A" is determined as the display combination. When (established), one medal is paid out. In addition, when the symbols of "black BAR"-"rip"-"rip" are stopped from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R on the effective line, that is, when "C_ONE_B" is determined (established) as the display combination, One medal will be paid out. In addition, when the symbols of "white BAR"-"rip"-"rip" are stopped from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R on the effective line, that is, when "C_ONE_C" is determined (established) as the display combination, One medal will be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the symbols of "watermelon"-"rip"-"rip" are stopped from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R on the effective line, that is, "C_10_WML" is determined as the display combination. When (established), 10 medals will be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when a combination related to "cherry", that is, "C_B_CH_A" to "C_B_CH_E" or "C_C_CH" is determined (established) as a display combination, seven medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when any of the roles related to "watermelon", that is, "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" is determined (established) as the display combination, six medals are paid out.

The display combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG. 15 is a combination that may be displayed when the display combination related to "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" cannot be established (missed). is there. The display combination related to these "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is a display combination that serves as an opportunity when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), the bonus end number counter, the game possible number counter, and the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 95 when the bonus is activated. It stipulates.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in which the operation is performed. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as the types of bonus games. The middle bonus is a so-called continuous operation device for a special character of the second kind, and is hereinafter referred to as "MB". The challenge bonus is a so-called type 2 special character, and is hereinafter referred to as "CB". The operation of the CB is continuously performed while the operation of the MB is being performed.

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operation of MB1 and MB2, which is started when the display of "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is triggered, ends when the medals reaching the specified number "13" are paid out.

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of "CB", that is, the so-called playable number of times. The operation of "CB" ends when one game is played.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states, RT0 game state to RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the RT game is that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the predetermined display combination is established). It triggers a transition between states.

Specifically, when the display combinations related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_A", "C_CU_REP_A", and "C_CU_REP_B" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state to RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combinations related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", and "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. To do. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Then, when the display combination related to "C_10_WML" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT1 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery.

Specifically, in the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used, and "43" is set as the number of lottery. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) game state, all the small winning combinations (internal winning combination related to the payout of medals) are determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storage area described later are turned on. It also invalidates the winnings of "MB1" and "MB2".

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to be provided with an internal lottery table used in the general gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning numbers in each RT game state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. ..

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) described later. It is the data for designating the internal winning combination.

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the winning number when the subtraction result is negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which the lottery value is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general game state is a table that is referred to in the RT0 game state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers 1 to 43.

In this embodiment, the lottery value is defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided for the game store to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small wins. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a key-type switch for setting (not shown). Is changed using.

For example, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state, the probability of winning the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_NMLRP1") in setting 6 is 7000/65536. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "1" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small role / replay data pointer "1" corresponds to the abbreviations "C_C_REP" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" (see FIG. 26 described later).

Further, in the internal lottery table for the general game state, the winning numbers "12" (abbreviation "F_R1_R2_KP"), "13" (abbreviation "F_R1_KP_R2"), "19" (abbreviation "F_KP_R4_R2_1") to "22" (abbreviation "F_KP_R2") The lottery value of ") is" 0 ". Therefore, when the internal lottery table for the general game state is referred to, the winning numbers "12", "13", and "19" to "22" are not won.

When the winning numbers "12", "13", "19" to "22" are won, "12", "13", "19" to "22" are acquired as data pointers for small roles and replays. The internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state does not shift to the RT2 gaming state.

Further, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state, the probability of winning the winning number "42" (abbreviated as "F_9 cards") in setting 6 is 1000/65536. Then, when the winning number "42" is won, "42" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer "42" corresponds to the internal winning combination related to the abbreviations "C_9_SEVN" and "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" (see FIG. 26 described later).

FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "19" and "21" are "3750", respectively. As described above, when any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "19" to "22" specified according to the winning numbers "19" to "22" is acquired, "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" The internal winning combination related to the above is decided. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "14" and "16" are "10000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "15" and "17" are "6000", respectively. Is. The lottery value of the winning number "18" is "10846".

When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "14" to "18" specified according to the winning numbers "14" to "18" is acquired, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to The internal winning combination related to "C_SBB_D" is determined (see FIG. 25). Therefore, in the case of the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" is determined, and the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state. There is.

FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "20" and "22" are "5000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "23" and "24" are "8000", respectively. Is. When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20", "22" to "24" specified according to the winning numbers "20", "22" to "24" is acquired, "C_small" The internal winning combination related to "V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" is determined (see FIG. 26). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT4 gaming state. ..

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20" and "22" specified according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT4 game state is a table referred to in the RT4 game state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "12" and "13" are "13000", respectively. When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" is determined. To. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

The winning numbers "28" to "33" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any of the gaming states of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and the lottery value is Each is "2730". When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "28" to "33" specified according to the winning numbers "28" to "33" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is determined. To.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" may be determined in any of the gaming states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, which allows display along the effective line. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. The "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the winning internal winning combination in the acquired data pointer.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to "1" of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when "1" is acquired as a bonus data pointer, "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are won as internal winning combinations.

25 to 28 show an internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "42". That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when "17" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_C_REP", "C_Koyama_REP_A" to "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning combinations. _REP_F "is duplicated. In addition, when "18" is acquired as a small role / replay data pointer, "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", and "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning roles. "_REP_A" to "C_Koyama_REP_F" and "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" are duplicated.

In addition, when "42" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_9_SEVN" and "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" are duplicate winning winning combinations.

In addition, when "25", "26", "28" to "33" are acquired as data pointers for small roles / replays, "C_10_WML" and "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" are used as internal winning combinations. , "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8" or "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4" are duplicated.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

The rotating cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. When the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "68" is selected.

1 of the US mark in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB game state (CB game state), and the small role / replay data pointers are “0” and “25 to 42”. Show the case. In this case, the rotation stop number "43" is selected. Further, 1 and 2 of the rice marks in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 indicate a case where the MB game state (CB game state) is in progress. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1" during the MB game state, the rotation stop number "44" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small combination / replay data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation cylinder stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37). Data related to the priority of the display combination can be acquired.

If the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table is selected by referring to the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 36). The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

The forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be referred to when forward-pressed. It is data. The "forward push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, "left middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35) to be referred to when an irregular pressing is performed. The "irregular push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "right middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started to be stopped, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as "sliding piece number determination data"), the pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 37). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 34) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIG. 35) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 33), which will be described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32) is "1" and the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12".
If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 34 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the "A line" column in each stop table, and the "B line" column. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by allocating information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the rotation of the reel is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop or the like. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether or not "1" is specified as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces. As a result of this search, a difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 37).

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number. Then, even when the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop and the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, "00" is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

If the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position in the attraction priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the attraction priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "0", the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "04" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is the same as the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned stop table for first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 32). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a higher priority has priority over the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a lower priority. It is done in.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "01", "03", and "04", the number of priority divisions is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are "00" and "02". In the case of, the number of priority divisions is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority order when the pull-in priority table number is "01" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "1" includes "C_BAR_A", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8", and "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3". The pull-in data corresponding to is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "2" corresponds to "C_BAR_B", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_C", and "C_B_REP_H" to "C_B_REP_J". Data is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "3" includes "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H", "C_BAR_C" to "C_BAR_E", "C_B_REP_D" to "C_B_REP_G", and "C_B_REP_K". ~ The pull-in data corresponding to "C_B_REP_P" is specified.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order”). ") Is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 94, which will be described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and the search order “1” is supported. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock win according to the winning number related to the internal lottery during the RT4 game state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (pressing operation on the start lever 16) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is drawn, and when the generation of the game lock is determined, the game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is subtracted by a predetermined lottery value. To do. And. The lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the game lock is won when the result of the subtraction is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the lottery value that the game lock wins when the winning numbers are "36" (abbreviation "F_strong angle check") to "41" (abbreviation "F_reach eyes"). To specify. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are "33" to "41", whether or not to execute the game lock is drawn. For example, when the winning number is "37" (abbreviated as "F_middle stage check"), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536. The internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "36" to "41" indicates a specific example of a predetermined internal winning combination related to the gaming machine of the present invention.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described.
The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

For example, when the symbol "rip" is stopped and displayed on the winning judgment line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (rip) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. Although description is omitted here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects is also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 26, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 41. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 26, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). When "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "Rip"-"Rip"-"Bell 2" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the winning judgment line. Is held in. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 42.
Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, the MB ("C_MB1" or "C_MB2") is being operated, and the game state is in the MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage area 1) and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2-29) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 45. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Pull-in priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 38).

Although detailed description is omitted in the present specification, the ROHM cartridge substrate 76 also stores various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various production operations, and various types required for the sub RAM 103. A storage area is appropriately provided.

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of gaming states of "RT0 gaming state" to "RT4 gaming state" are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” with reference to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17).

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state is "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state". Also, in the "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state", or "RT4 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is "RT1 game state". To move to.
The "bell spilled eye" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG.

Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip A" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order rip A” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_A” shown in FIG.

In the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state". Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip B” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” shown in FIG.

In the "RT2 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT3 game state".
The “BB / RB lip” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG.

In the "RT3 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state". Further, in the "RT1 game state" or the "RT2 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state" or "RT4 game state", if the combination of symbols related to "watermelon lower bell" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is It shifts to "RT0 game state".
The "watermelon lower bell" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_10_WML" shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when the player is in the "RT3 game state", and the second ART is executed when the player is in the "RT4 game state". The "RT3 gaming state" shifts when the display combinations of "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" are established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS_A" is "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". That is, a combination of symbols based on the number "7", which is usually adopted as a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus (in addition, a design having better visibility than other symbols may be used) is used. When the stop display is displayed, the gaming state shifts to the "RT3 gaming state", and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus".

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the RT1 game state, the stop order (display assistance) for displaying the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" on the winning determination line. Information) is notified, and it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip B" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state".

Then, in the "RT2 game state", the display auxiliary information for displaying the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" on the winning determination line is notified. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT2 gaming state" to the "RT3 gaming state". As a result, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", or "RT3 game state", the symbol related to "push order lip C" is used. Notify the stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning judgment line. Then, it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip C" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the "RT4 gaming state". As a result, the second ART is executed.

[Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described.
FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, and shows the types of display combinations that are established according to the stop order.

“C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. Then, "C_CD_REP" indicates a display combination ("C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. Further, the “normal rip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to the re-game that is not related to the transition of the game state.

Further, "C_BNS" indicates a display combination ("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z") in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. As for "C_BNS * 1", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_A" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T" are not displayed. Further, in "C_BNS * 2", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_O" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_N" and "C_BNS_U" to "C_BNS_Z" are not displayed.

“C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Then, "C_small V" indicates a display combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") in which the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART) is determined.

“C_3_BEL” indicates a display combination (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) not related to the transition of the gaming state. When "C_3_BEL" is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to "C_3_BEL", "C_9_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") that is not related to the transition of the gaming state. If "C_9_BEL" is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

As described above, "C_10_WML" is a display role in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

Further, "C_13_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP") not related to the transition of the gaming state, and "C_14_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL"" not related to the transition of the gaming state. C_14_BEL_K ") is shown. When "C_13_BEL" is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when "C_14_BEL" is established, 14 medals are paid out.

During the MB game state, either "C_13_BEL" or "C_14_BEL" can be established, and the process ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game in the MB game state, the MB game state ends in that game. As a result, the player acquires 11 medals (14 (payout number) -3 (insertion number) = 11 (acquisition number)).

On the other hand, when "C_13_BEL" is established in the first game and "C_14_BEL" is established in the second game during the MB game state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) -6 (input number) = 21 ( The number of medals won)) can be won. In the MB game state, the winning numbers "1" (rotation stop number "43"), "4" (rotation stop number "46"), "19" (rotation stop number "61") , "21" (rotation stop number "63") is determined, "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game.

In the present embodiment, the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to the replay such as "C_CU_REP" and "C_CD_REP", the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to "Bell" such as "C_3_BEL" and "C_9_BEL", and the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to "Bell" such as "C_3_BEL" and "C_9_BEL". The push order is set for the success or failure of the stop display of the combination of symbols related to "C_10_WML".

For example, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", the internal winning combination is "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B" and " "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "12" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_CU_REP" (either "C_CU_REP_A" or "C_CU_REP_B"), provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle"). The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_CD_REP" (any of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to "normal rip" (any of "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Will be done.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "14", the internal winning wins are "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T", "C_BNS_Y", and "C_C_REP". , "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_F" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "14" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "normal rip"("C_C_REP","C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P"", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". The combination of symbols related to any of) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of "C_BNS * 1"("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_Y") is stopped on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" and "left and right middle". Is displayed.
If the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of "C_BNS * 2"("C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T"). The combination of symbols related to () is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the combination of symbols related to "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" is stopped and displayed.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "25", "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_B" , "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4", "C_10_WML" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "25" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_3_BEL"("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". -A combination of symbols related to "C_3_BEL_B8", "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4") is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_10_WML" is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". As a result, 10 medals are paid out.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "28", the internal winning wins are "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_CHN_A", and "C_10_WML". Wins. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", "28" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, if the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). , "C_3_BEL" (any of "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "C_HAZ" ("C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H") The combination of symbols related to)) is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

Therefore, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the stop button is pressed at a timing other than the specified timing (incorrect answer), the medal will not be paid out.

Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed. As a result, nine medals will be paid out.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_10_WML" is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". As a result, 10 medals are paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 49 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT shift, and shows the shift destination of the RT game state according to the stop order.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "12", the symbol related to "normal lip" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT game state is not changed.

For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the RT4 gaming state has not been determined, a notification that the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" (display auxiliary information) is notified. To do. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. That is, in order not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state, it is notified that the stop order should be set to "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "14", it is set to "C_BNS (* 1)" on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "BB flag" or "BB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "RB flag" or "RB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "right left middle" or "right middle". Notifies that it is good to set it to "left" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "18", the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and "white 7"- Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of "white 7"-"white 7" symbols.

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 game state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" is off, the stop order is changed to "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". Then, it notifies that it is good (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT game state is not changed. That is, in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), it is notified that the stop order should be "middle left / right" or "middle right / left".

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Here, the sub-game state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In the present embodiment, as the sub-game state, the general state, CZ (chance zone), the first ART (pseudo-bonus), the second ART, and the preparation for ART (the second ART is started after the end of the first ART). BR (Battle Rush) is set from the end of the first ART to the start of the second ART when it is decided to do so.

When the second ART (ART) is won by the ART lottery performed during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART"), after the end of the first ART, the first 2 ART is started. During the preparation for ART, it is a gaming period until the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) after the end of the first ART shifts to the RT4 gaming state in order to start the second ART. Specifically, when the display combination related to the unique internal winning combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") is established during the ART preparation, the ART preparation is completed and the second ART is completed. Is started.

[General state]
The general state is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT2 game state. During this general state, basically, a lottery (CZ lottery) for whether or not to shift to the CZ is performed with reference to the CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50) described later for each game. Then, when the transition to CZ is decided, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of precursor games of CZ").

As the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ is drawn at the same time as the lottery for whether or not to shift to CZ. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state and the games of the number of CZ precursor games are digested, the sub-game state is shifted from the general state to CZ. Then, after shifting to CZ, a notification that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") (hereinafter referred to as "navigation aiming at black BAR"). When is performed a specified number of times, CZ ends.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, the execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are exhausted before the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed a predetermined number of times, the execution of the first ART is determined.

In this embodiment, "CZ1" and "CZ2" are provided as CZs. In "CZ1", "4" is set as a specified number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ1" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed four times. On the other hand, in "CZ2", "10" is set as a predetermined number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ2" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed 10 times. The number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" of "CZ1" and "CZ2" is performed is managed by the cut-in number counter during CZ.

In "CZ1" and "CZ2", when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at black BAR" is the same. In addition, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" when a specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, "CZ2", which has a large number of specified times for "navigation aiming at black BAR", has a higher probability that the execution of the first ART is decided than "CZ1".

In addition, "CZ2" may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in the bonus lottery than "CZ1". Further, as the "CZ2" according to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the probability of winning a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") may be higher than that of the "CZ1".

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state, which is a so-called pseudo-bonus. For example, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined when a bonus is won by a bonus lottery during a general state, CZ, first ART, and second ART. Further, it is determined when the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed in CZ.

Further, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games predetermined by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of games predetermined by the lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game played after the end of the first ART. Then, when the bonus winning game number counter becomes "0", the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined.

When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if the bonus is won by the bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game counter becomes "0", or if the bonus winning is decided during CZ, the number of bonus winning games is newly decided by the lottery. Will be done.

The first ART (pseudo-bonus) is divided into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

The number of staying games (hereinafter, "the number of first ART start G (games)") is different between RB, BB, and SBB. In the present embodiment, the number of first ART start Gs when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be "30". Further, the number of first ART start Gs in the case of BB is determined to be "60", and the number of first ART start Gs in the case of SBB is determined to be "100".

The "first ART start G number" determined according to the type of pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). The first ART (pseudo-bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes "0".

The first ART is started after the games of the first ART precursor games number determined by lottery are digested and the games being prepared are passed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) has been won is performed. Then, when the first ART is won and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the preparation for BB is performed after the first ART precursor game is completed. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the preparation for RB is performed after the first ART precursor game is completed.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is stopped. The stop order for displaying is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is BB is started.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is SBB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "18", the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is notified. Will be done. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is SBB is started.

In the RB preparing game, the stop order for displaying the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS * 2" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT4 game state. For example, the second ART is performed by ART lottery during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART") which is started by winning other than during the second ART. Determined when ART wins. When the winning of the second ART is determined, "50" is determined as the number of games staying in the second ART (hereinafter, "the number of G (games) starting the second ART").

"50", which is the "second ART start G number", is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the second ART. The second ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0".

The second ART is started after the games of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by the lottery are digested and the games in preparation for ART are passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the second ART is won is performed. Then, if the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

In the ART preparation game, the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_small V" is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_Small V" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

In the second ART, the number of additional games is drawn (lottery for the number of additional games) by referring to the number of additional games lottery table (not shown) for each game, and the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART, which is advantageous for the player, can be continued for a long time.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (battle rush) is a sub-game state related to an effect in which the number of ART games is expected to be added (added), and is executed during the second ART. The lottery for whether or not to execute this BR is for each game during BB (hereinafter referred to as "BB during ART") in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) started by winning during the second ART. Is done in. In addition, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period during which BR is being executed.

In BR, a BR continuation lottery is performed every predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is determined, an additional G (game) number lottery is drawn to draw an additional (additional) number of ART games. Do. The number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is notified in the last (10th game) game of the predetermined number of games. Further, the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter.

Further, when the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in this embodiment), the additional G number An additional G (game) number lottery, which is different from the lottery, is performed.

There are five types of additional G number lottery according to the present embodiment: "additional addition A", "additional addition B", "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3". When the additional G number lottery is performed, the type of the additional G number lottery is determined by the additional G number lottery during BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional G number lottery.

The number of additional games to be added by the additional G number lottery is determined and notified by a special number of games (“2” in the present embodiment) that is performed after the predetermined number of games is completed. Further, the number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is added to the number of additional games counter. When the game of the special number of games is completed, the game of the predetermined number of games is started, and if the BR continuation is decided, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game of the predetermined number of games. To.

In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity for the next number of ART games to be added after the predetermined number of games. As a result, the interest in determining the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest in the game can be improved for a long period of time.

In addition, in a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect in which the addition of the number of ART games is expected to be continuous. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery in the games of the predetermined number of games. That is, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery by using the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. As a result, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is decided exceeds the specified number (“20” in this embodiment), as a benefit, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) win and BR (battle) The start of the rush) is decided. As a result, the result of the continuous lottery can include an expectation other than the addition of the number of additional games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in the present embodiment), an additional G number lottery is performed. Another additional G number lottery is performed. As a result, the value of the number of additional games may increase due to the continuous continuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, the CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning contents of the CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 50, when the CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be "no win". For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), there is a probability of 32718/32768 that there is no winning, and a probability of 50/32768 that it is "CZ2 winning".

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The cut-in additional lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This cut-in additional lottery table in CZ shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of addition of a specified number of times and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the cut-in additional lottery using the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1 addition to the specified number of times" is always determined, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In that case, "1 addition to the specified number of times" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When "1 is added to the specified number of times" is determined, "1" is added to the value of the cut-in number counter during CZ. As a result, the number of times of performing "navigation aiming at black BAR" in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for generating cut-in in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 52. The cut-in occurrence lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table shows the lottery values set according to the presence or absence of the loss cut-in occurrence when the result of the internal lottery is “loss”.

In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is "loss", "loss cut-in occurrence" is determined with a probability of 10000/32768. The lost cut-in is a "navigation aiming at the black BAR" performed when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") does not win. In "Navigation aiming at black BAR", it is notified that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") and the stop order (right middle left) in that case. To do. When the loss cut-in is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed.
Even when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is winning, "Navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 53. This bonus lottery table is referred to in the normal processing (see FIG. 110) and the ART processing (FIG. 106) described later. In addition, this bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), the "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"). If, the "bonus win" is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the "bonus winning" is determined, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started after the first ART precursor game and the preparing game corresponding to various bonuses.

The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 shows a bonus lottery table for a low probability in which the probability that the "bonus win" is determined is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table for high probability is provided, which has a higher probability that a "bonus win" is determined than a bonus lottery table for low probability. In the present embodiment, the bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes described later.

[Bonus lottery table for spills]
Next, the spill bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The spill bonus lottery table is referred to in the bonus lottery process (see S793 of the display command reception process shown in FIG. 116 described later) performed when a predetermined condition described later is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that "42" (abbreviated as "F_9 card combination") shown in FIG. 19 is determined as the winning number, and a specific display combination other than "C_9_SEVN" is established. .. Here, the specific display combinations other than "C_9_SEVN" are "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" (see FIG. 14). That is, the fact that a specific display combination other than "C_9_SEVN" is established means that a combination of symbols related to a specific internal winning combination ("C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C") other than "C_9_SEVN" is displayed on the valid line. That is.

The spill bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus win and the lottery value set according to the winning number. In the bonus lottery using the spill bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is subtracted by the lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

Therefore, in the bonus lottery using the spill bonus lottery table, the "bonus win" is determined with the probability of 3277/32768, and the "no win" is determined with the probability of 29491/32768.

[Lottery table with additional G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a lottery table for adding the number of G in BB will be described. The G number addition lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB in the first ART. The lottery table for adding the number of Gs in the BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the BB medium G number addition lottery using the BB medium G number addition lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), "20G" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"). In some cases, "10G" is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the G (game) number such as "10G" or "20G" is determined, the determined G number is added to the BB medium-high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the ART lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 56. The ART lottery table in BB shown in FIG. 56 is referred to when it is in BB during non-ART and is in a high probability state described later. This ART lottery table in BB is the second when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). The lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the winning of ART is shown.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the non-ART BB and in a high probability state, the "ART winning" is always determined when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination. This "ART winning" means that the winning of the second ART has been decided. When the "ART winning" is determined, the second ART is started after the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The BR lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB during ART and is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB is a BR winning combination when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). Indicates the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of.

In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the BB during ART and in a high probability state, when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, there is a probability of 16384/32768 "Battle Rush (BR) 1". "Winning" is decided, and "Battle Rush (BR) 2 winning" is decided with a probability of 3276/32768. "BR2" has a higher probability of winning "BR continuation" in the continuous lottery than "BR1". The determined "BR1" or "BR2" is started after the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is completed.

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when it is in BR1. Further, the BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 59 is referred to when it is in BR2. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table show lottery values set according to the presence or absence of BR continuation.

In the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected as the lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional extra lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the additional lottery table added during BR will be described. The additional lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional lottery table added during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the number of continuations of BR.

In the additional addition lottery using the additional addition lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the number of continuations of BR is "5" (BR5th station), "additional addition A" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "additional addition B" is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. .. Further, the "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, the "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and the "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[Additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is set. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 25768 / 32768, and "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Will be done. In addition, "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. If it has already been decided to perform the additional additional lottery, the additional additional lottery during BR and the promotion lottery table are used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to promote to the higher additional additional lottery.

It should be noted that the higher-ranked additional additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of additional games to be determined will be larger than that of the lower-ranked additional additional lottery. In the present embodiment, "additional addition B" is higher than "additional addition A", and "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3" are higher than "additional addition B". Further, the "additional addition C2" is higher than the "additional addition C1", and the "additional addition C3" is higher than the "additional addition C2".

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional A is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional A" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the additional G number.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, "10" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 12568/32768, and as the "additional game number" with a probability of 13000/32768. "20" is determined. Further, "100" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "200" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of the "additional game number" is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional addition B addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional B is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional B" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table is performed every time a stop operation is detected. The “1 on” column shown in FIG. 63 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed. Further, the column of "2on_before +10" is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. To. Then, the column of "3on_before +10" is referred to when the third stop operation (third stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. To.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "1on", "20" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after "20" is determined as the "additional game number" in the first stop operation, the column of "2on_before +20" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "2on_before +20", "30" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after "30" is determined as the "additional game number" in the second stop operation, the column of "3on_before +30" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "3on_before +30", "50" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of "100" is acquired as the "number of additional games", and "100" is displayed in the ART game number counter. Will be added.

With reference to the column of "2on_before +20" in FIG. 63, "0" and "10" are not determined as the number of additional games. Further, referring to the column of "2on_before +30" in FIG. 63, "0", "10" and "20" are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column of "3on_before +50", "0", "10", "20" and "30" are not determined as the number of additional games.

In this way, in the additional G number lottery using the additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation, and the third The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional C is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional C1", "additional additional C2", or "additional additional C3" is performed in BR. This additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the type of additional additional C (C1 to C3).

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is performed every time the pressing of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and ends when "0" is determined as the "additional game number" ("0"). No continuation "). The additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table shows a specific example of the continuous hitting additional effect according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "additional addition C1", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 8918/32768. Further, in the case of "additional addition C2", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, in the case of "additional addition C3", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 2918/32768.

Therefore, the "additional addition C2" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C1", and the "additional additional C3" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C2". high.

If the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started when the additional G number lottery using the additional G number lottery table is started, the additional additional C additional G is automatically added. An additional G number lottery is performed using a number lottery table. Then, when "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" in the automatically added G number lottery, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. The automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, "1000") of the value of the "additional game number" to be determined.

Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, a value other than "0" is determined as the "additional game number", and the start lever 16 is operated in a state where "continuation" is determined. In some cases. In this case, the "number of additional games" determined up to that point is enabled, and the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the "number of additional games" determined before the automatically performed additional G number lottery is added to the "additional game number" determined in the automatically performed additional G number lottery, and the additional game is added. C Addition G number Let it be the "additional game number" obtained by the addition G number lottery using the lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 73. The causal value lottery table is referred to when the causal value lottery is performed by satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to various conditions.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value called "causal value" is obtained in various situations in which the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 1). This causal value lottery table (No. 1) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between rare roles.

The rare roles according to this embodiment are "strong bell" (winning number "27"), "watermelon" (winning number "34"), "weak cherry" (winning number "35"), and "strong cherry" (winning number "35"). The numbers are "36") and "chance eyes" (win numbers "38" to "40"). The "G number between rare roles" is the number of Gs from when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination to when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the "G number between rare roles" reaches "50G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.
If the "G number between rare roles" exceeds "200G", a causal value lottery is performed with reference to the "200G" column every time the subsequent "G number between rare roles" increases by 100G.

FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between bonuses. The period between bonuses is the number of Gs from the end of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between bonuses" reaches "200G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (No. 3) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between BBs. The interval between BBs is the number of Gs from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between BBs" reaches "400G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (No. 4) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between ARTs. Between ARTs is the number of Gs from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

For example, when the "G number between ARTs" reaches "500G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive RBs. The number of consecutive RBs is the number of times that RBs are continuously drawn as a type of pseudo-bonus when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by the RB continuous counter.

For example, when the "continuous number of RBs" is "4", "5" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo-bonus).

FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (No. 6) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The number of consecutive CZ failures is the number of consecutive times that "CZ1" and "CZ2" end without determining the first ART (pseudo-bonus). In this embodiment, a column is also provided when the CZ failure is the first time. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by the CZ failure continuous counter.

For example, when the "number of consecutive CZ failures" is "failure_2 consecutive", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined in "CZ1" and "CZ2". The value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started.

FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus.

For example, when the "number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus" is "4G", "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

“CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the interest of the player is enhanced because the determination of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) can be expected more than in the general game. However, since the end condition of "CZ1" and "CZ2" according to the present embodiment is the number of executions of "navigation aiming at black BAR", there is a possibility that it will end in a short period (small number of games). Therefore, when "CZ1" and "CZ2" are completed in a short period of time, the probability of giving a "causal value" or giving a "causal value" is increased. As a result, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game. it can.

FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows a causal value and a lottery value set according to the causal value.

For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768, and "40" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 73 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G digested during the preparation of various pseudo bonuses and ART (second ART). Further, the number of G digested during preparation is counted by the counter for the number of digested G during preparation.

For example, when the "number of games digested during preparation" reaches "20G", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000 / 32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the preparing digestion G number counter is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART are started.

[Temporary causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the provisional causal value and the lottery value set according to the type of development effect.

The "development effect" according to the present embodiment is whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won by being continuously executed over a plurality of games. It is a production that informs you. Then, "when the development effect fails" is a case where the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is not won in the development effect, or the CZ (chance zone) is not won.

The notification that the first ART (pseudo-bonus) was won in the development effect and that the CZ (chance zone) was won was determined to start the "gaming state advantageous to the player" related to the gaming machine of the present invention. This is a specific example of "notification of things". Then, the notification that the first ART (pseudo-bonus) was not won in the development effect and that the CZ (chance zone) was not won is notified of the "gaming state advantageous for the player" related to the gaming machine of the present invention. This is a specific example of "notification that the start of is not decided".

The "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" may be notification of various winnings such as the winning of the second ART (ART). In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (so-called "BB", "MB", etc., which serves as a carry-over role), the bonus is won as "notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been decided". You can give a notification of what you have done.

In addition, the time when the "game state advantageous to the player" is started may be from the next game in which the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination related to the bonus) has been decided, and a special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to the start of the bonus) has been stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned deterministic notification of various winnings as described above, and is described above. It may be a notification suggesting various kinds of winnings. Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention deterministically notifies that the various winnings as described above have not been determined. It may be a notification suggesting that various winnings have not been determined.

In the provisional causal value lottery using the provisional causal value lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if "development effect 1" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, if the "development effect 4" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The "causal value" is determined based on this "provisional causal value" and the "internal point" described later.

"Development effect 1" shows a specific example of the first effect related to the gaming machine of the present invention, and "development effect 4" shows a specific example of the second effect related to the gaming machine of the present invention. The "development effect 4" has a higher probability of being notified that the start of the gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, has been decided than the "development effect 1". Therefore, in the "development effect 4", if it is notified that the start of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player has not been decided, the player's dissatisfaction will increase, but the advantageous privilege will be given later. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, the internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The internal point lottery table is referred to when performing an internal point lottery. Then, the internal point lottery is performed in each game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between the internal points and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won. The internal point lottery shows a specific example of the internal point determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1" is determined as the "internal point" with a probability of 512/32768, and the "internal point" has a probability of 265/32768. "3" is determined as. The determined "internal point" is added to the internal point counter. The internal point counter shows a specific example of the point accumulating means according to the game of the present invention.

The value of the internal point counter is the maximum value of the "causal value" determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "10". In this case, since "10" is guaranteed as the maximum value of the "causal value", "5" of the "provisional causal value" is determined as the "causal value".

On the other hand, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "3". In this case, since "3" is guaranteed as the maximum value of "causal value", "5" of "provisional causal value" is not determined as "causal value" as it is, and internal points acquired so far. "3", which is the same value as, is determined as a "causal value".
If the development effect fails and the "causal value" is determined, the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal value stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when giving a player a favorable privilege based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table shows the presence or absence of consumption of the causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the consumption of the causal value stock.

The "causal value stock" is given when the "causal value" becomes "100" or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes "100" or more, "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won. The causal value stock consumption lottery shows a specific example of the causal value consumption determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

For example, when giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the value of the causal value stock, "no consumption" of the "causal value stock" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, the player is given an advantageous privilege without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

As a privilege given to the player based on the value of the causal value stock, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo-bonus to a higher pseudo-bonus. For example, when "BB" is determined as a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to "SBB". Further, when the transition to CZ1 is decided, the transition to CZ2 may be changed.
In this embodiment, a specific example of the privilege giving means in which the sub CPU 102 grants a privilege advantageous to the player is shown.

Benefits that are advantageous to the player are not given immediately when the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, but when specific conditions (determination of pseudo bonus) are met, or at a specific time (determination of pseudo bonus). It is preferable to give it when the pseudo bonus is drawn). In this case, after the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, it is possible to urge the player to play the game until a specific condition is satisfied or a specific time is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The operating condition table is referenced during each preparation. This operating condition table shows the type being prepared and the operating (end) condition set according to the type being prepared.

For example, if the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") is won during the preparation for SBB, the preparation for SBB ends and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started. If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during BB preparation, the BB preparation is completed. BB in (bonus) is started.

If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during RB preparation, the RB preparation is completed and the 1st bonus RB at is started. Also, during the preparation for ART, the winning numbers "18" to "24" (abbreviations "F_W7_KP_RT4", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1" The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

In the present embodiment, when the winning combination (winning number), which is the end condition under preparation, is won, the information (stop order navigation) for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even if the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that is the end condition during preparation is not displayed as a stop, the preparation ends.

Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT game state does not shift to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART is set as the sub game state. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and the second ART in the sub-game state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state.

<Structure of storage area provided in sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Although the description is omitted here (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering the effect content and the effect number and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. It has a storage area and the like.

The sub storage area has "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag" and "RB2 flag".

The "CZ1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ1, and when it is in CZ1, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 flag". The "CZ2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ2, and when it is in CZ2, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 flag".

The "SBB flag" is a flag indicating SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus), and when it is in SBB, "1" is stored in the "SBB flag". The "BB flag" is a flag indicating the inside of the BB in the first ART, and when the "BB flag" is in the BB, "1" is stored in the "BB flag". The "RB flag" is a flag indicating RB in the first ART, and when it is in RB, "1" is stored in the "RB flag".
That is, when the first ART is in progress, "1" is stored in any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag".

Further, the "ART flag" is a flag indicating that the second ART is in progress, and when the second ART is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART flag".

The "BR1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR1, and when it is in BR1, "1" is stored in the "BR1 flag". Further, the "RB2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR2, and when it is in BR2, "1" is stored in the "BR2 flag". As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set is repeated (looped) as long as "BR continuation" continues to win by continuous lottery.

Further, the sub storage area has an "additional addition A flag", an "additional addition B flag", an "additional addition C1 flag", an "additional addition C2 flag", and an "additional addition C3 flag".

The "additional addition A flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition A is in progress, and when the additional addition A is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition A flag". The "additional addition B flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition B is in progress, and when the additional addition B is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition B flag".

The "additional addition C1 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C1 is in progress, and when the additional addition C1 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C1 flag". The "additional addition C2 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C2 is in progress, and when the additional addition C2 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C2 flag". The "additional addition C3 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C3 is in progress, and when the additional addition C3 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag". It should be noted that "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag" from the time when the additional addition C3 is determined to the time when the additional addition C3 is started.

"CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag 2", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag", "Additional addition A flag", "Addition" The "additional B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag", and "additional addition C3 flag" actually start after the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is determined. "1" is stored until.

Further, the sub storage area has "CZ1 precursor flag", "CZ2 precursor flag", "BB precursor flag", "RB precursor flag", "ART precursor flag" and "BR precursor flag".

The "CZ1 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ1 precursor flag, and when the CZ1 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 precursor flag". The "CZ2 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ2 precursor flag, and when the CZ2 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 precursor flag".

The "BB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BB (SBB) precursor, and when the BB (SBB) precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BB precursor flag". The "RB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the RB precursor, and when the RB precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "RB precursor flag".

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether to use "SBB", "BB" or "RB". However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus is won, only whether or not to set it to "RB" is determined, and when it is decided not to set it to "RB", "RB" is set at the end of the precursor. You may draw a lottery as to whether it is "SB" or "BB".

The "ART precursor flag" is a flag indicating the ART (second ART) precursor, and when the ART precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART precursor flag". Further, the "BR precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BR precursor flag, and when the BR precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BR precursor flag".

Further, the sub storage area has "SBB preparing flag", "BB preparing flag", "RB preparing flag", and "ART preparing flag".

The "SBB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the SBB is being prepared, and when the SBB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag". The "BB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the BB is being prepared, and when the BB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag".

The "RB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the RB is being prepared, and when the RB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "RB preparing flag". The "ART preparing flag" is a flag indicating that ART is being prepared, and when ART is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "ART preparing flag".

In the present embodiment, "preparing" means a section in which it is conceptually determined to start a predetermined state, but the start condition cannot be satisfied and the start cannot be started. During preparation, it resembles aura, but unlike aura, it actively encourages people to meet the starting conditions.
For example, when the occurrence of ART is determined, it is necessary to make AT and RT co-occur in order to start ART. The AT can be started immediately by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), while the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub-control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, in general, indirectly by performing "AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91". It is urging the start of RT. That is, in general, the difference generated between the AT start timing by the sub control circuit 101 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section called preparation.

Then, if the determination of the ART end condition is started at the start of the AT, the AT period is included in the ART period. Therefore, in some cases, the ART period ends without the ART occurring. There is a risk. Such a gaming machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design and development difficult because the expected ART period at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual ART period. It is also a factor.
Therefore, although the AT is performed until the RT (main control circuit 91 side) condition is satisfied, a section is provided so as not to be included in the ART period by not determining the ART end condition. And since this section is the section where ART is being prepared, it is said that this section is being prepared.

In addition, the sub storage area includes "CZ game number counter", "pseudo-bonus game number counter", "ART game number counter", "BR game number counter", "additional additional game number counter", and "additional game number counter". "have.

"1" is added to the "CZ game number counter" every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the "CZ game number counter" is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In the "pseudo-bonus game number counter", the number of games ("30" or "60" or "100") set according to the types of various pseudo-bonus is set before the pseudo-bonus is started. ..

Then, the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is deducted by "1" each time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). When the "BB medium-high probability counter" described later has a value, the subtraction of the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is stopped.

The "ART game number counter" is set to "50" before the second ART is started. Then, the "ART game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in the second ART. The "BR game number counter" is set to "10" before BR1 or BR2 is started. Then, the "BR game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

"2" is set in the "counter for the number of additional additional games" before the game related to the additional additional effect is started. Then, the "counter for the number of additional additional games" is subtracted by "1" each time a game related to the additional additional effect is performed.

The "additional game number counter" is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when the additional games are added. Therefore, each time the number of additional games is determined in the additional addition, the determined number of additional games is added to the "counter for the number of additional games".

In addition, the sub storage area is "CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ", "BB medium and high probability counter", "precursor game number counter", "preparing digestion G number counter", "internal point counter", " It has a "causal value counter" and a "causal value stock counter".

The "CI count counter in CZ" is set to "4" before CZ1 is started and "10" is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the "CI count counter in CZ" is subtracted by "1" each time the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" (cut-in effect) occurs.

When the number of additional Gs related to the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined by the lottery for adding the number of Gs in BB, the determined number of additional Gs is added to the "BB medium-high probability counter". When there is a value in the "BB medium-high probability counter", the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is in the high-probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

In the "precursor game number counter", the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the "precursor game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in each precursor. "1" is added to the "preparing digestion G number counter" each time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the "preparing digestion G number counter" is cleared when each preparation is completed.

In the "internal point counter", when the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery, the value of the determined internal point is added. When the "causal value" is determined based on the total of the internal points and the "provisional causal value", the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the "internal point counter".

In the "causal value counter", when the "causal value" is determined by the causal value lottery, the determined "causal value" is added. When the value of the "causal value counter" exceeds "100", "100" is subtracted from the value of the "causal value counter" and "1" is added to the "causal value stock counter". The “causal value counter” and the “causal value stock counter” indicate a specific example of the causal value accumulating means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

Further, the sub storage area has a "BR continuation flag", a "BR one after another continuous storage area", and "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

The "BR continuation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, and when it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, it is set to the "BR continuation flag". "1" is stored.

The "BR continuous storage area one after another" is a storage area indicating whether or not BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, "1" is stored in the "BR one after another continuous storage area".

In the present embodiment, a special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When the special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues until the set one after another. Further, when it is decided that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a special effect for notifying whether or not the special BR is "continued" is performed.

“BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are flags indicating whether or not the execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When the execution of BR1 is determined, "1" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32". When the execution of BR2 is determined, "2" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 100, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 79.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each game.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random value used for reel effect and lock control in the "continuous lock state", and stores the extracted effect random value in the effect random value storage area (non-existent) provided in the main RAM 95. Stored in (shown) (S5). In the present embodiment, as the effect random value, the effect random value 1, the effect random value 2, and the effect random value 3 are provided. These effect random values 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. It should be noted that the start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the internal winning combination and the like, and information on whether or not the occurrence of the game lock has been determined, and is the first of the "information related to the lock" in the game machine of the present invention. A specific example of 1 is shown.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the reel effect performed in the "continuous lock state" determined in the process of S8 and the reel effect and the lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of lock are mainly performed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by the interrupt process (see FIG. 100), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). Further, in this process, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) are used. To match. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S16). The medal payout process shows a specific example of the game medium giving means according to the present invention. In this process, the hopper 43 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is 14.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 43.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state, the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "1", and in the other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state), the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "3". Set to.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery value change process (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by 1.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

On the other hand, in S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current Acquire the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer according to the winning number (S49).

Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table (when the determination is YES). (See FIG. 24), and the internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S54).

After the processing of S54 or when the determination in S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S55).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). When the main CPU 93 determines in S56 that it is not in the CB gaming state (when the determination in S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 79). ..

On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CB gaming state is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (when the determination in S56 is YES). S57). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT game state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 4 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). Then, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT game state flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 81). ) Move to S43.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT game state that is turned on. The lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “24”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 19) is changed with reference to (S62). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 81).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described. In addition. The game lock lottery process shows a specific example of the game lock lottery means according to the game machine of the present invention.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state (S71). When the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is not in the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and shifts the process to S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 79). ..

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is in the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and sets the effect random value to 1. Based on this, a game lock lottery is performed (S72).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock has been won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has not been won (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 79). Move to.

On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has been won (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the game lock flag and the lock timer. As a result, the game lock is generated. That is, the process of S74 shows a specific example of the lock generating means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 79. (S101).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 93 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 79). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described. The lock process at the start of the game shows a first specific example of the locking effect determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts. Move to S11 (see FIG. 79).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from, for example, a rotating reel, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storage process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The pull-in priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 37).

In addition, when the symbols of the winning combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to the winning combination (for example, “cherry”) are displayed on some reels, “ In the reel that becomes "ANY", the attraction priority data of the combination is not acquired. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S129).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). When the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

On the other hand, in S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 79). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 86) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S124 of the process (see FIG. 86).

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 43) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S142). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S124 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 86).

In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the symbol code storage process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 86) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In the present embodiment, as the effective line (winning determination line), one line (center line) is provided as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 86).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S168 as the search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 88 (S170). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 86 (S176). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 79). (See), move to S15.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). When the main CPU 93 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 89).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 90) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). When the main CPU 93 determines in S201 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is in the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 pushes the stop button forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 32, 34 and 35).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 93 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 90) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 91). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). When the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 91). ) Move to the processing of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. Is completed, and the process is transferred to S189 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 90) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 91).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 91). ) Move to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 90) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 91). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). It should be noted that the C line status is set when the forward push is performed in the control change process after the second stop (see FIG. 96), which will be described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 91). ) Move to the process of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button by pressing forward, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the process of S224 changes the line mask data from "00010000" to "01000000". As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 91). ) Move to the process of S205.

Further, in S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). .. When the main CPU 93 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. (See 90), or move to the process of S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 91).

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 90) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 91). ) Move to the process of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 90) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value in the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips acquired in S234. The number of pieces is evacuated (S237).

Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 90).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and performs the process in S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 89). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control change process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 89). ..

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 89).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 95). To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is pushing forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 95). Then, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. See 95) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 95) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for stopping, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 95).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a display command transmission process (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the “MB” (“MB1” or “MB2”) is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 79). Move to.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S322).

In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "MB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 13 during the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

On the other hand, in S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at the end of CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the values of the winning number counter and the game possible number counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "CB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 79). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is not operating (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 processes during CB operation based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

Further, when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S334). In the present embodiment, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is the winning of the bonus game. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S338 described later.

On the other hand, in S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 16). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S335). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). Set the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operating process described in S333 described above is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

Further, when the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 79). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 79).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 79) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch of the stop switch board 65 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). , Drive and control the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S345, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S347). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 118, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 by using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of the plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the processing of S502, if the received command type code is any one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than the plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the command type is not normal (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). .. The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 retrieves a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S515 described later.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the lamp data (S517). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S517, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S521), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data or the like is determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S524).

In S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S525). In this process, when the additional addition B flag is on, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S527).

In S527, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display command is received (YES in S527), the sub CPU 102 performs the display command reception process (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 registers the registered effect number and the effect data at the time of display according to the display combination. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.
After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S527, when it is determined that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S529). In S529, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S529 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S530). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S529 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S531).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for starting the bonus (S532). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S533). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S533 that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S533 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for the bonus end (S534). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

In S533, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S533 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the no-operation command is received (S535). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S535 that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S535 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 102). Move to S515.

On the other hand, in S535, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S535), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S536). The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later. After the processing of S536, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S522 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the effect content determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception processing described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is in progress (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus in-process (S542). The details of the pseudo-bonus processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not in progress (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (S543). .. During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the ART (S544). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal processing (S545). The details of the normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

After the processing of S542 and S545, the sub CPU 102 performs the preparatory processing (S546). Details of this preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). The details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect lottery process (S548). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. After the processing of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the pseudo-bonus processing performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (S561). Examples of the pseudo-bonus preparation flag include an SBB preparation flag, a BB preparation flag, and an RB preparation flag. Therefore, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparing flag is that the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") wins in the internal lottery process. The start conditions corresponding to the BB preparation flag and the RB preparation flag are the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_7") in the internal lottery process. It is to win.

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus start time processing (S563).

In the pseudo-bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparing flag corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus, and pseudo-values (“100” or “60” or “30”) corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus. Set to the game counter during the bonus. Further, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparing digestion G number counter. After the processing of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104).

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 does not satisfy the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 104).

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag for the pseudo bonus is not on (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB flag is on (S564).

In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is ON (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 increases the number of Gs in the BB based on the lottery table (see FIG. 55). An additional lottery process is performed (S565). The lottery process for adding the number of Gs in the BB shows a specific example of the means for drawing the number of additional games in the assisted state according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the BB medium G number addition lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium / high probability counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process in BB based on the ART lottery table in BB, or a BR lottery process in BB based on a BR (battle rush) lottery table in BB (S566). The ART lottery process in BB and the BR lottery process in BB show a first specific example of the benefit determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the ART lottery process in BB also serves as a first specific example of the assisted state lottery means according to the present invention.

Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. If it is determined as a role, ART lottery processing during BB is performed. In addition, it is a BB during ART, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is determined as an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. In that case, BR lottery processing is performed.

When the "ART win" is determined in the ART lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the "ART flag" (stores "1" in the "ART flag"). Further, when the "battle rush 1 win" is determined in the BR lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 stores "1" in the "BR stock storage area". Then, when the "battle rush 2 win" is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores "2" in the "BR stock storage area".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S566 is the winning result (S567). That is, it is determined whether or not any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning is won (when the determination in S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" (S568). The "reverse push" in the present embodiment means that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) "7", "8", "10", and "11". In the present embodiment, when the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". On condition that, the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed, "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-" It is possible to stop and display the combination of the symbols of "white BAR". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is performed.

Perform the stop operation according to "Reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)", and the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed along the straight line. Then, the player can recognize that any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" has been decided. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, the "ART win" is determined, and if it is an ART BB, the "battle rush 1 win" or the "battle rush 2 win" is determined.

Even if the data pointers (win numbers) for small roles and replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2" If none of the "wins" has been decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is not performed. That is, even if the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" can be stopped and displayed, any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" can be displayed. If is not decided, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, ART lottery processing in BB or BR lottery processing in BB is performed. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery processing, the ART lottery processing in BB or the BR lottery processing in BB may be performed.

For example, if an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined and one of "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning", and "Battle Rush 2 winning" is determined, then the special internal winning combination is determined. When the winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed. That is, after that, when a special internal winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push" is performed regardless of the result of the ART lottery process in BB or the BR lottery process in BB. Navi (navigation aiming at white BAR) ".

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S567 that it is not a winning prize (when the determination in S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a Gase reverse push lottery based on a Gase reverse push lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the reverse push lottery is performed. Then, when the "Gase reverse push winning" is decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the ART lottery processing in BB and the BR lottery processing in BB are not performed. Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", none of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", "C_HOM_B" to "C_HOM_J" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" are determined in duplicate as internal winning combinations ( (See FIGS. 25 and 26). Then, when the small combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is changed to "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)". Even so, the combination of the "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that none of the "ART win", the "battle rush 1 win", and the "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

When "C_HOM_B", "C_HOM_E" to "C_HOM_G" are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, "white BAR"-"white BAR" until the second stop. The combination of the symbols of "white BAR" is a stop mode (so-called "tempai") in which the stop can be displayed along a straight line. Then, at the third stop, the combination of the symbols "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" is not stopped and displayed.

After the processing of S568 and S569, or when the determination in S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is ON (S570).

In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is ON (when the determination in S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery processing in the RB based on the ART lottery table in the RB (not shown). Alternatively, the BR lottery process in RB is performed based on the BR lottery table in RB (not shown) (S571). The ART lottery process in RB and the BR lottery process in RB show a second specific example of the benefit determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the ART lottery process in RB also serves as a second specific example of the assisted state lottery means according to the present invention.

Specifically, when it is a non-ART RB and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is "7", "8", "10", "11", the number of ART sets in the RB is set. Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, if the RB is in ART and the data pointers (winning numbers) for small wins / replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the BR lottery process in RB is performed.

After the processing of S571 or when the determination in S571 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium / high probability counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB medium / high probability counter by "1" (S573). ..

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB medium-high probability counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter (1). S574).

After the processing of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 104).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is not 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus end processing (S576).

In the pseudo-bonus end-time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus that has ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing. When the type of the finished pseudo-bonus is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs the ART start processing. Further, when "1" or "2" is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR start processing. This BR start processing shows a specific example of the special set game starting means according to the present invention.
After the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the ART processing performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53). Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582). The bonus lottery process shows a specific example of the assist state determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

When the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on.

After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional lottery process based on the additional lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. The BR lottery process may be performed separately from the additional lottery process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "preparing flag (ART preparing flag)" is on (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag is ON (when the determination in S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104). Move to S546.

In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag is not ON (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the ART game number counter by "1" (S585). After the processing of S585, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a value of 1 or more for the number of additional games. Whether or not it is determined (S586).

In S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S586 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional game number counter by "1". (S587). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (S588).

In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (when the determination in S588 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the additional additional A. The G number lottery process is performed (S589). In the additional additional A additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional A additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 62), and adds the determined additional game number to the ART game number counter. .. After the processing of S589, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is not on (when the determination in S588 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is "0" (S590).

In S590, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S590 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 104).

In S590, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S590 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the additional additional C flag ("additional additional C1 flag", " It is determined whether or not the "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") is on (S591).

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition C flag is ON (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S592). The additional addition C addition G number lottery process of S592 shows a specific example of the automatic addition addition lottery according to the gaming machine of the present invention. That is, the additional C additional G number lottery process of S592 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional C additional G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is completed. Will be executed if

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional C additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 64), and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is "continuation" (S593). If "1" or more is determined as the number of additional games by the additional C additional G number lottery process of S592, it becomes "continue", and "0" is determined as the additional game number by the additional additional C additional G number lottery process. If so, it will be "no continuation".

In S593, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is "continue" (when the determination in S593 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S592, and the number of additional games is calculated by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S592. The processing of S592 and S593 is repeated until "0" is determined. Even if the number of times the additional C additional G number lottery process is performed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), "no continuation" is determined and the additional C additional G number lottery process is completed. Good. Further, when the number of times the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is performed reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is "continuation", the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no continuation. The additional addition C addition G number lottery process may be completed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S593 that it is not "continuation" (when the determination in S593 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S594). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 causes the corresponding additional addition flags (“additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3”. Flag ") is turned off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

After the processing of S594, or when the determination in S591 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S595). The details of the BR continuous processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S595, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S586 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S596).

In S596, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S596 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition and promotion lottery processing (S597).

In the additional addition and promotion lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table (see FIG. 61), and the additional addition flag corresponding to the determined addition content (“additional addition A flag”, Turn on the "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag").

Only one of the additional additional flags is turned on. Moreover, even if the additional addition may shift to the upper rank, it does not shift to the lower rank. For example, if the additional content determined this time is higher than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined last time is turned off, and the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined this time is turned on. .. On the other hand, if the additional content determined this time is lower than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the previously determined additional content is kept on.

In S596, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S596 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation rewriting lottery process (S598).

In the BR continuation rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 draws whether or not to rewrite the BR "discontinuity" to "continuation" based on the BR continuation rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "discontinuation" of the BR to the "continuation", the BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 108).

After the processing of S597 and S598, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BR game number counter by "1" (S599). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is "1" or more (S600). In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (process at the time of receiving the start command). (See FIG. 104).

In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S601).

In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR end processing (S602). At the end of BR processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the turned-off flag is the "BR2 flag", or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, "20 or more"), the sub CPU 102 uses the "SBB flag" and the "SBB preparing flag". And "BR1 flag" are turned on. That is, the BR end processing shows a specific example of the benefit granting means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. After the processing of S602, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process when the BR continues (S603). In the BR continuation addition process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the BR continuation addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of additional games to the value of the ART game number counter. In the additional lottery process for continuing BR of the present embodiment, "0" is not determined as the number of additional games, but a specified number (for example, "10") or more is determined. In addition, the BR continuous addition process shows a specific example of the additional game number lottery means according to the present invention.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is ON (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "2" to the value of the additional addition game number counter (S605). After the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is not ON (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S606). After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

[BR continuous processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuous processing performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 106 and 107) will be described. This BR continuation processing shows a specific example of the special set game continuation lottery means according to the present invention.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "10" to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR successive continuation flag is "1" (S623).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and sets the BR continuation continuation storage area to "1". 2 ”is set (stored) (S624).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation lottery process (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is decided to continue BR in S625 (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it has not been determined to continue the BR (when the determination in S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing and the ART processing (FIGS. 106 and FIG. (See 107) also ends.

After the processing of S624, or when the determination of YES in S626, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation determination processing (S627). The details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing, and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 106 and 107).

[Processing when BR continuation is decided]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BR continuation determination processing performed in S627 in the flowchart of the BR continuation processing flowchart (see FIG. 108) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process during BR (S641). This additional addition lottery process in BR shows a specific example of the additional addition effect determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the additional addition lottery process during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the additional addition content based on the additional addition lottery table during BR. Then, the additional addition flag ("additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") corresponding to the determined additional addition content is set. Turn on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a continuous lottery process one after another in BR (S643). In the BB one after another continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to "continue" the BR one after another based on the BR one after another continuous lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to "continue" the BR one after another, "1" is stored in the BR one after another continuation storage area. If the value of the BR successive continuous storage area is "2", the BR continuous continuous lottery process is not performed. After the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination processing and also the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 108).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal processing performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in CZ (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on and the CZ precursor flag is off. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that it is not in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

In the present embodiment, in a general state, a plurality of modes in which the winning rate of CZ and the winning rate of a bonus (pseudo-bonus) are different are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the mode based on the mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ rush lottery process (S663). In the CZ rush lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won based on the CZ rush lottery table (not shown). Then, when the winning of the CZ is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the winning of the bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus ("SBB", "BB" or "RB") is determined based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter. After the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that the sub CPU 102 is in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in additional lottery process in the CZ (S665). This cut-in additional lottery process in CZ shows a specific example of the notification number additional lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add "1" to the specified number of times based on the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table (see FIG. 51). Then, when it is decided to add "1" to the specified number of times, "1" is added to the CI number counter in CZ.
As the cut-in additional lottery process in CZ according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add "2" or more to the specified number of times.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)". Is set (S667).

When the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). Is a condition, the combination of symbols related to "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E" is stopped and displayed. As a result, if the winning number "4" is won and the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", depending on the timing of the stop operation, "black BAR"-"black BAR" corresponding to "C_BAR_A" "-The combination of" black BAR "symbols may be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" and the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed, the player , You can recognize that you have won the bonus (pseudo bonus).

After the processing of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus winning processing (S668). This bonus winning process shows a specific example of the advantageous state determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ) Is turned on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S669). In the CZ end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CI number counter during CZ. After the processing of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has not been won (when the determination in S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in generation lottery process during CZ (S671). This cut-in generation lottery process in CZ shows a specific example of the notification generation lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. The CZ medium cut-in generation lottery process determines whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)”) based on the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table (see FIG. 52). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a win to generate a cut-in (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (the processing at the time of receiving the start command). (See FIG. 104).

In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" (S673). ).

In the present embodiment, when "loss" is determined by the internal lottery process, a lottery is performed in S671 to determine whether or not to generate a cut-in ("reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)"). Therefore, in S671, even if it is decided to generate a cut-in and the stop operation is performed according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)", "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" The combination of symbols of "" is not stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the stop table selected at the time of "loss" of the present embodiment displays the right when the stop order is "right, left, middle" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). The number of sliding pieces at which the "black BAR" can be stopped is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols will be stopped and displayed until the second stop.

After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the CI count counter in CZ by "1" (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter during CZ is not "0" (when the determination in S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 104).

In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (when the determination in S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). The details of the causal value-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S677). After the processing of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the causal value-related processing performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal processing (see FIG. 110) and S723 in the flowchart of the processing in preparation (see FIG. 112) will be described.
The causal value-related processing of the present embodiment is executed at various timings based on the conditions according to the various causal value lottery tables.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 65 to 73), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs the processing during normal processing (normal processing). It is transferred to S677 of (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparatory process (see FIG. 112).

In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the causal value stock counter (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S704). After the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value-related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 of the normal intermediate processing (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparing processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the preparatory process to be performed in S546 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is being prepared (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is not in progress (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and shifts the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104). Transfer.

In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is in progress (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the preparation digestion G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S723).

After the processing of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operating condition table (see FIG. 77) and determines whether or not the operating conditions are satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating conditions are not satisfied (NO in S724), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparing flag and clears the value of the preparing digestion G number counter. (S725). After the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the preparatory processing, and shifts the processing to S547 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

[Omen check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor (S741). During the precursor, the value of the precursor game counter is "1" or more. In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is not in progress (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104). Transfer.

In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is in progress (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the precursor game number counter by "1" (S742). However, if the preparing flag is on, the value of the precursor game counter is not subtracted by "1".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (S473). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives a start command. Move to S548 of time processing (see FIG. 104).

In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (when the determination in S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of CZ (S744). .. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of CZ by the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that it is at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ start process (S745). This CZ start processing shows a specific example of the specific game starting means according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

In the CZ start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and sets the initial value according to the type of the CZ flag in the CI count counter during CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is "4", and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is "10". After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104).

In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of the bonus (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of the bonus by the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the bonus (S747). In the bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and performs the bonus start processing according to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Do.

When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparing flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparing flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparing flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104).

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of ART (second ART) (S748). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of ART (second ART) by the ART precursor flag.

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing (S749). In the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparing flag. However, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART preparing flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 sets "50" in the ART game number counter. After the process of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104).

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of BR (S750). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of BR by the BR precursor flag.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and performs the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104) S548. Move to.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S752). After the processing of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 104).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines the effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined effect number is stored in the sub storage area.

When "42" (abbreviated as "F_9 sheets") shown in FIG. 19 is determined as the winning number, the sub CPU 102 indicates that "42" is won as the winning number in the production number lottery process of S761. Determine the production number related to the production to be shown. Here, the effect of indicating that "42" is the winning number is, for example, if the design of "Red 7" on the left reel 3L can be aimed and displayed (in the middle area in the display window 4L). (If it can be stopped), the display combination related to "C_9_SEVN" is established, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed to the effect that nine medals can be paid out.

Further, during the first ART or the second ART, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speakers 20L and 20R are used to notify the stop order in which a specific small winning combination that is given a privilege advantageous to the player can be established. Determine the production number related to the production to be performed. For example, when "28" (abbreviated as "F_middle bell A") shown in FIG. 19 is determined as the winning number, the sub CPU 102 targets the first stop operation in the effect number lottery process of S761. The production number related to the production indicating that the reel is the middle reel 3C is determined. According to this effect, when the player performs the stop operation in the stop order in which the middle reel 3C is the target of the first stop operation, the display combination of "C_9_BEL" ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") can be established. Yes (see Figure 48). That is, when "28" is determined as the winning number, nine medals, which are relatively large in number, can be paid out as compared with the case where "C_3_BEL", which is a winning number overlapping with "C_9_BEL", is established ( See FIG. 13). Therefore, during the first ART or the second ART, the player can receive more medals than other sub-game states (for example, general game states).

If "28" is determined as the winning number and "C_10_WML" is established in duplicate with "C_9_BEL" and "C_3_BEL", the number of medals to be paid out when "C_9_BEL" is established ( More medals (10) than 9) will be paid out. Therefore, when focusing only on the number of medals to be paid out, it can be said that "C_10_WML" is a smaller role in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given than "C_9_BEL". However, when "C_10_WML" ("watermelon lower bell") is established, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is compared with the RT3 or RT4 gaming state which is the RT gaming state staying in the ART. It will shift to a low RT0 game state. Considering this point, "C_9_BEL", which can maintain the RT game state in the RT3 or RT4 game state while receiving the payout of 9 cards, is smaller than "C_10_WML" in that it is given a privilege advantageous to the player. It is a role. Therefore, it can be said that notifying the stop order in which "C_9_BEL" can be established informs the player of the most advantageous stop order.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a provisional causal value lottery process (S763). .. This provisional causal value lottery process shows a specific example of the provisional causal value determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the provisional causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the provisional causal value lottery table and determines the provisional causal value based on the type of development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). This causal value determining process shows a specific example of the causal value determining means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal point, and determines it as the causal value. Then, the determined causal value is added to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the causal value stock (S766). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S767). After the processing of S767, when the determination in S762 or S765 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock effect has occurred (S768). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock effect is generated based on the parameters of the start command.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S768 that the lock effect has not occurred (when the determination in S768 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 104). To do. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect has occurred (when the determination in S768 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the effect number determined in S761 in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a fake effect parameter lottery process (S770). The fake effect parameter is a parameter for determining the effect number of the fake effect by the same process as the normal effect number lottery process (performed in S761), and is a parameter that substitutes for the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (S771). The confirmation screen means that the liquid crystal display device 11 is displaying a screen for notifying that the bonus has been determined.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that the development effect is not in progress or the confirmation screen is not in progress (when the determination in S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process using the fake effect parameter determined in S770. S772). After the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104).

In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the fake push order navigation effect lottery process (S773). After the processing of S773, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 104).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and directs the processing. The process moves to S526 of the content determination process (see FIG. 103).

In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional B flag is on. (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is not on (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 103), move to S526.

In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is ON (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery process (S783). In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional B additional G number lottery table, and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter.

In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is acquired by referring to the number of additional games counter.

After the process of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (see FIG. 103). ) S526.

In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B end time processing (S785). In the processing at the end of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the additional game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the additional game number counter is cleared. After the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 103).

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the display command reception processing performed in S527 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a general state, CZ, a first ART, or a second ART (S791). In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is neither a general state, CZ, the first ART, or the second ART (when the determination in S791 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the process to S797. Transfer.

In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is any of the general state, CZ, the first ART, or the second ART (when the determination in S791 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing. Move to S792. In S792, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed based on the parameter specifying the display combination included in the received display command (S792). ). In S792, when the sub CPU 102 determines that none of the combinations of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S792 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S797.

In S792, when the sub CPU 102 determines that any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S792 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses a spill bonus lottery table (FIG. The bonus lottery process is performed based on (see 54) (S793). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 first subtracts a random number value extracted from 0 to 32767 with a lottery value. Next, by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred), the bonus winning or no winning is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S793 is a bonus win (S794). In S794, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery result is not a bonus win (when the determination in S794 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S797.

In S794, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery result is a bonus winning (when the determination in S794 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus distribution lottery process (S795). In the bonus distribution lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on (S796). If the sub-game state is the first ART and the bonus is won, the bonus is won this time and the type of bonus determined by the bonus distribution lottery process is started. That is, in the next process at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. 104), the preparatory process related to the bonus won this time (see S546 in FIG. 104) is performed. Then, after the operating conditions are satisfied and the precursor check process is performed, the bonus of the type determined by the bonus distribution lottery process is started.
Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S797.

In S797, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination, then ends the process at the time of receiving the display command, and performs the process for the effect content determination process (see FIG. 103). ) S529.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S536 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S808.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional C flag is on. (S802). In S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional additional C flag is not on (when the determination in S802 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S808.

In S802, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional additional C flag is ON (when the determination in S802 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of input cards is the number that can start the game (S803). The fact that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game means that the start operation can be accepted.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S808. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S804). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S804 that the BET switch 62 is not on (when the determination in S804 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S808. On the other hand, in S804, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is ON (when the determination in S804 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S805). The additional addition C addition G number lottery process of S805 shows a specific example of the additional addition lottery according to the gaming machine of the present invention.

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional C additional G number lottery table. Then, the determined number of additional games is added to the value of the number of additional games counter. When the number of additional games of "1" or more is determined in the lottery process for the number of additional G added C, the "continuation" of the additional additional C is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "continuation" is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S806). In S806, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has been determined (when the determination in S806 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S808.

In S806, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has not been determined (when the determination in S806 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S807). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the additional game number counter is cleared.

After the processing of S807, when S801, S802, S803 or S804 is a NO determination, and S806 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 102 performs a lock effect control process (S808). The details of the lock effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the processing of S807, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 103).

[Lock effect control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the lock effect control process performed in S808 in the flowchart of the non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 117) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the RT4 gaming state (S821). The RT game state information controlled by the main CPU 93 is sent from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as a parameter such as a start command. In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S825.

In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is preparing for ART or during the first ART (pseudo bonus). It is determined whether or not it is other than (S822). In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S822 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S825.

In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is other than during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S822 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is locked under the control of the main CPU 93. It is determined whether or not the production brake has been started (S823).

When the lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "main lock effect") controlled by the main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment is started, first, the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated forward. Next, a brake is generated on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop the forward rotation. Then, after rotating the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reverse direction, the main lock effect is finished. Information indicating that the forward rotation, braking, stopping, and reverse rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been started is included in, for example, a no-operation command. That is, the non-operation command shows a second specific example of "information related to the lock" in the gaming machine of the present invention.

In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has not been started (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S825.

In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the brake for the main lock effect has been started (when the determination in S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts the delay count (S824). In this process, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is set in the delay counter. After the processing of S824, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 117).

When the determination in S821, S822 or S823 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the delay is being counted (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is not in progress (when the determination in S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S830.

In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is in progress (when the determination in S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is in progress (S826). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S826 that the main lock effect is not in progress (when the determination in S826 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S830.

In S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is in progress (when the determination in S826 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000. (S827).

In the present embodiment, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is acquired in S824 and set in the delay counter. That is, with the number of clocks of the sub CPU acquired in S824 as the counting starting point, it is determined whether or not the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks is acquired from the sub CPU 102.

In the present embodiment, when the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of clocks of 1000000 to the number of clocks set in the delay counter is acquired from the sub CPU 102, one second has elapsed from the time when the number of clocks of the sub CPU is set in the delay counter. To do. Therefore, in S824, it is determined whether or not one second has elapsed since the brake for the main lock effect was generated.

In S827, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 does not exceed 1000000 (when the determination in S827 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S830.

In S827, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1,000,000 (when the determination in S827 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub-CPU 102 effect determination process (when the determination is YES). S828). In the sub-game effect determination process, a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "sub-game effect") controlled by the sub CPU 102 is determined according to the internal winning combination, the sub-game state, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 ends the delay count (S829). In this process, the value of the delay counter is cleared.

After the processing of S829, when the determination in S825, S826 or S827 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is completed (S830). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is completed. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S830 that the main lock effect has not been completed (when the determination in S830 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and processes when a non-operation command is received (FIG. 117). See) also ends.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S830 that the main lock effect has ended (when the determination in S830 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect ends (S831). As a result, the effect determined before the game lock occurs (the effect determined before the fake effect and the sublock effect) is executed after the game lock ends.

After the processing of S831, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 117).

[Direction related to game lock]
Next, the effect to be executed when the game lock occurs will be described.

In the present embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game lock during the RT4 game state (see FIGS. 39 and 83). When the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is started, and even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed until a predetermined period elapses, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

During the period in which the game lock is generated, the main CPU 93 (main control circuit 91) executes the main lock effect. This main lock effect is a reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are operated in the order of forward rotation, brake, stop, and reverse rotation.

On the other hand, when the game lock occurs, the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined by the effect number lottery process in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769 in FIG. 114). Then, the fake effect is determined and executed (see S770 and S772 in FIG. 114). This fake effect can be determined by the effect number lottery process that is normally performed by using the fake effect parameter. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program design and debugging related to the lottery of fake production.

The fake effect is the same as the effect performed in a normal game (a game in which the game lock does not occur), and is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the like. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the effect is a fake effect during the game lock or an effect performed in a normal game. As a result, during the forward rotation of the main lock effect and during the execution of the fake effect, the player can be made to think that the normal game has started.

When the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) uses the number of clocks of the CPU to count from the occurrence of the brake to the elapse of 1 second (see S823, S824, and S827 in FIG. 118). ). Then, one second after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sublock effect is determined and executed (see S828 in FIG. 118). That is, when one second elapses after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the effect performed by using the display device is changed from the fake effect to the sublock effect.

In the sublock effect, the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, etc. are used to shift to a pseudo bonus (first ART) or ART (second ART) (shift to a gaming state advantageous for the player). Notifies that has been determined. That is, in the subblock effect, an image different from the image displayed in the effect executed in the normal game is displayed.
When the game lock and the main lock effect are completed, the effect corresponding to the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect is completed is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward in the same manner as in the case where the normal game is performed, and then the brake is generated. However, the fake effect controlled by the sub CPU 102 (same as the effect performed in a normal game) is sustained for 1 second after the brake is generated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the notification of information by the effect related to the game lock.

<Display role when the winning number "42" is winning>
Next, in the gaming machine configured as described above, the display combination when the winning number "42" is won will be described.

When "42" (abbreviated as "F_9 reels") shown in FIG. 19 is determined as the winning number, the main CPU 93 relates to any one of "C_9_SEVN", "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" (see FIG. 14). The reel stop control process (see FIG. 89) is performed so that the display combination is established.

Specifically, for the middle reel 3C, the main CPU 93 has the symbol positions "4" and "7" in the middle region of the display window 4C (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. , "10", "15", "20", the reel stop control process is performed so that any "rip" symbol is displayed. It should be noted that, between the above-mentioned "rip" symbols on the middle reel 3C, the number of symbols within the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" is arranged.

Further, for the right reel 3R, the main CPU 93 has symbol positions "0", "4", and "4" in the middle area of the display window 4R (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The reel stop control process is performed so that any "rip" of "8", "12", or "16" is displayed. It should be noted that, between the above-mentioned "rip" symbols on the right reel 3R, the number of symbols within the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" is arranged.

Further, in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the symbol position "4" "bell 2", the symbol position "5" "watermelon", and the symbol position "6" shown in FIG. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of "Rip", "Bell 1" of the symbol position "7", and "Red 7" of the symbol position "8" is displayed, the main CPU 93 is in this middle stage area. The reel stop control process is performed so that "red 7" is displayed in.

Therefore, in this case, the combination of the symbols "Red 7"-"Rip"-"Rip" is displayed on the effective line. That is, the display combination related to "C_9_SEVN" (see FIG. 14) is established.

On the other hand, in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the "watermelon" of the symbol position "9", the "rip" of the symbol position "10", and the symbol position "11" shown in FIG. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of "bell 1", "white BAR" at the symbol position "12", and "white BAR" at the symbol position "13" is displayed, the main CPU 93 is in the middle region. The reel stop control process is performed so that the "white BAR" of the symbol position "12" or "13" is displayed.

Therefore, in this case, a combination of "white BAR"-"lip"-"lip" symbols is displayed on the effective line. That is, the display combination related to "C_ONE_C" (see FIG. 14) is established.

On the other hand, in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the “lip” of the symbol position “15”, the “bell 2” of the symbol position “16”, and the symbol position “17” shown in FIG. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of "watermelon", "cherry" at the symbol position "18", and "black BAR" at the symbol position "19" is displayed, the main CPU 93 is placed in this middle region. The reel stop control process is performed so that the "black BAR" at the symbol position "19" is displayed.

Therefore, in this case, a combination of "black BAR"-"lip"-"lip" symbols is displayed on the effective line. That is, the display combination related to "C_ONE_B" (see FIG. 14) is established.

On the other hand, in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the “lip” of the symbol position “20”, the “bell 2” of the symbol position “0”, and the symbol position “1” shown in FIG. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when either "watermelon" or "white 7" of the symbol position "2" is displayed, the main CPU 93 puts "white 7" of the symbol position "2" in this middle area. Is displayed, the reel stop control process is performed.

Therefore, in this case, a combination of "white 7"-"lip"-"lip" symbols is displayed on the effective line. That is, the display combination related to "C_ONE_A" (see FIG. 14) is established.

When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "rip" of the symbol position "3" shown in FIG. 11 is displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the main CPU 93 is pressed. , The reel stop control process is performed so that the "bell 2" of the symbol position "4" is displayed in this middle area.

Therefore, in this case, a combination of "bell 2"-"lip"-"lip" symbols is displayed on the effective line. That is, none of the display combinations are established, resulting in "loss".

Further, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "watermelon" at the symbol position "14" shown in FIG. 11 is displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the main CPU 93 is subjected to the stop operation. , The reel stop control process is performed so that the "watermelon" at the symbol position "14" is displayed in this middle area.

Therefore, in this case, a combination of "watermelon"-"rip"-"rip" symbols is displayed on the effective line. That is, none of the display combinations are established, resulting in "loss".

<Recommended stop operation>
In the gaming machine configured as described above, the recommended stop operation, which is a predetermined stop operation, is set as the recommended stop operation when the sub-game state is the general state and the stop order is not notified. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the recommended stop operation is a forward push, and the "black BAR" (see FIG. 11) of the symbol position "19" is displayed in the upper area in the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) for the left reel 3L. It is a stop operation performed at the timing when it is performed.

As the winning number, either "35" (abbreviation "F_weak angle che"), "36" (abbreviation "F_strong angle che") or "37" (abbreviation "F_middle angle che") shown in FIG. When the recommended stop operation is performed when is determined, the main CPU 93 displays the "cherry" (see FIG. 11) at the symbol position "18" in the middle area or the lower area in the display window 4L. The reel stop control process (see FIG. 89) is performed as described above. If the stop operation is performed when "cherry" is not displayed in the middle area or the lower area in the display window 4L, the main CPU 93 detects the stop operation in the reel stop control process, and then the symbol is displayed. The position is moved (so-called "sliding") to display "cherry" in the middle area or the lower area in the display window 4L.
As a result, a display combination related to any of "C_B_CH_A" to "C_B_CH_E" and "C_C_CH" (see FIG. 15), which are internal winning combinations related to "cherry", is established, and seven medals are paid out.

Further, when the recommended stop operation is performed when "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon") shown in FIG. 19 is determined as the winning number, the main CPU 93 moves the symbol position in the middle region in the display window 4L. The reel stop control process (see FIG. 89) is performed so that the “bell 2” of “0” is displayed. Therefore, by performing the subsequent stop operation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R at an appropriate timing, the "watermelon" symbol is displayed on the middle reel 3C and the "blank" or "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the right reel 3R. If it can be done, the display combination related to "C_CD_WML_E" or "C_CD_WML_F" in the internal winning combination related to "watermelon" is established. As a result, 6 medals are paid out.

In this way, if the recommended stop operation is performed when the sub-game state is the general state and the stop order is not notified, the "cherry" and "watermelon", which are the roles related to the payout of medals, cannot be established. , The risk of so-called omissions can be reduced.

Here, the recommended stop operation is set in consideration of the expected value of the medals to be paid out. Specifically, a stop operation in which the expected value of the medals to be paid out is higher than when another stop operation is performed is set as the recommended stop operation.

"C_B_CH_A" to "C_B_CH_E", "C_B_CH_E", which are internal winning combinations related to "cherry" (see FIG. 11) at the symbol position "18" corresponding to any of the winning numbers "35" to "37" (see FIG. 19). To establish "C_C_CH" (see FIGS. 15 and 28), stop so that the "cherry" (see FIG. 11) at the symbol position "18" is displayed in the middle or lower region in the display window 4L. You need to do something. Therefore, the stop operation in which the "cherry" at the symbol position "18" can be displayed in the middle area or the lower area in the display window 4L is different from the stop operation in which the "cherry" cannot be displayed. This is a stop operation with a high expected value.

On the other hand, in order to display the combination of symbols related to "C_9_SEVN" (see FIG. 14) corresponding to the winning number "42" (see FIG. 19) along the effective line, the player has to display the middle area in the display window 4L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation on the left reel L3 so that "red 7" (see FIG. 11) of the symbol position "8" is displayed. Therefore, a stop operation capable of displaying "red 7" of the symbol position "8" in the middle region in the display window 4L (as described above, any of the symbols of the symbol positions "4" to "8" is in the middle region. The stop operation at the timing when it can be displayed) is a stop operation in which the expected value of the medals to be paid out is higher than the stop operation in which "Red 7" cannot be displayed.

Here, the probability that the winning numbers "35" to "37" to be won by the internal winning combination related to "cherry" is determined is 1302 (the sum of the lottery values of the winning numbers "35" to "37" shown in FIG. 19). ) / 65536, and the number of medals to be paid out when the internal winning combination related to "cherry" is established as the display combination is seven. On the other hand, the probability that the winning number "42" in which "C_9_SEVN" wins as the internal winning combination is determined is 1000/65536 (see FIG. 19), and the medal to be paid out when "C_9_SEVN" is established as the display combination. The number is nine.
Therefore, comparing the above stop operation that can display "cherry" and the stop operation that can display "red 7", the stop operation that can display "cherry" is paid out slightly. The expected value of the medal becomes high.

Therefore, the stop operation capable of displaying the "cherry" at the symbol position "18" in the middle or lower region in the display window 4L, that is, the upper region in the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) for the left reel 3L. The stop operation performed at the timing when the "black BAR" (see FIG. 11) at the symbol position "19" is displayed is set as the recommended stop operation.

The symbols related to the internal winning roles "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to "watermelon" on the left reel 3L are the symbol positions "0", "4", "16", "bell 2", and the symbol position "8". "Red 7" and "white BAR" of the symbol positions "12" and "13". The number of symbols arranged between these symbols is set within 4, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the main CPU 93 puts one of the above symbols related to the internal winning combination related to the "watermelon" in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line. It can be displayed. Therefore, when comparing the stop operation that can display "cherry" and the stop operation that can display "red 7", the expected value of the medal to be paid out when the internal winning combination related to "watermelon" is established is calculated. No need to consider.

Further, in setting the recommended stop operation, in addition to the expected value of the medals to be paid out, the number of small winning combinations that can be established and the difficulty of pressing may be taken into consideration. For example, a stop operation performed at a timing when the number of small winning combinations that can be established is relatively large may be set as a recommended stop operation. Further, a stop operation performed at a timing in which a design that is more conspicuous than other symbols and is relatively easy to press can be displayed in the display window 4L may be set as a recommended stop operation. In addition, the recommended stop operation may be set by comprehensively considering the expected value of these medals to be paid out, the number of small winning combinations that can be established, and the difficulty of pressing.

<Operation of the first embodiment>
Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described.
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that draw lots for whether or not to control an AT (whether or not to generate an AT) based on the winning combination by an internal lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155664). The gaming machine described in). However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155664, whether or not to generate AT is determined only by lottery based on the winning combination by the internal lottery, so that the gaming becomes monotonous and the interest of the gaming is reduced. There is a concern that it will be done.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in the effect number lottery process of S761 in the effect lottery process (see FIG. 114), the sub CPU 102 has “42” (abbreviated as “F_9 sheet combination”) shown in FIG. When winning, the production number related to the production indicating that fact is determined. Further, in the game in which the winning number "42" is won in the processing at the time of receiving the display command (see FIG. 116), the sub CPU 102 has another internal winning combination with "C_9_SEVN" as shown in FIG. 27. When any of the winning combinations "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is established as the display combination, the bonus lottery process is performed based on the spill bonus lottery table (see FIG. 54) (S792).

Therefore, when the effect indicating that "42" is won as the winning number is performed, the player stops and displays the symbol of "Red 7" on the left reel 3L in the middle area in the display window 4L. , "C_9_SEVN" is established and 9 medals are paid out (see FIG. 14), or one of the display roles of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is established and one medal is paid out. You can choose whether to receive (see FIG. 14) and expect to win the medal by the bonus lottery process. That is, the game can be played by arbitrarily selecting whether to receive the payout of a relatively large number of medals immediately or to expect that a large number of medals will be paid out later by winning the bonus. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first ART is determined not only by the bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) but also by the bonus lottery based on the spill bonus lottery table (see FIG. 54). That is, since there are a plurality of modes for determining whether or not ART can be executed, the game is diversified as compared with the case where there is only one mode for determining whether or not ART can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, only one "red 7" symbol on the left reel 3L, which constitutes the display combination of "C_9_SEVN", is arranged on the left reel 3L, and the stop display is displayed in the upper area in the display window 4L in the recommended stop operation. It is placed in a place away from the "black BAR" design. Therefore, when "42" is won as the winning number and the player chooses to establish "C_9_SEVN" and receive the payout of nine medals, the left reel 3L constituting "C_9_SEVN" is formed. "Red 7" can be easily stopped and displayed.

Further, when the player performs the recommended stop operation when the winning number "42" is won, the reel stop control process of the main CPU 93 causes the middle area in the display window 4L constituting the effective line to be displayed. "Black BAR" is displayed. That is, "C_ONE_B" (see FIG. 14) can be established as a display combination. Therefore, when the player chooses to receive the payout of one medal and expect to win the bonus by the bonus lottery process, the recommended stop operation is performed to display the "C_ONE_B". Can be easily established.

<Modification example>
In the present embodiment, as an opportunity to start the delay count, it is determined that the brake of the main lock effect is started, that is, the signal indicating that the brake of the main lock effect is started is received. However, the trigger for starting the delay count related to the gaming machine of the present invention can be arbitrarily set after the start of the gaming lock. That is, it can be arbitrarily set from the fact that various signals sent from the main control circuit have been received since the start of the game lock.

For example, the game lock may be started as an opportunity to start the delay count. That is, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) starts the delay count when it receives a stand command including information indicating that the occurrence of the game lock has been started (determined). In this case, it is advisable to execute the main lock effect in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped immediately after the start of the game lock. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the game lock has been performed immediately after the start of the game lock.

In this way, when the start of the game lock is used as an opportunity to start the delay count, the sublock effect by the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, etc. is executed from the start of the game lock until a predetermined period elapses. Not done. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the information notified by the sublock effect immediately after the start of the game lock. In addition, it is possible to give the player a surprise or a sense of incongruity that the sublock effect is not executed even though the game lock is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the notification of information by the sublock production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production related to rock.

Further, in the present embodiment, "1 second (1,000,000 clocks)" is adopted as a predetermined period for counting by the delay counter. However, the predetermined period related to the gaming machine of the present invention can be set to any period as long as it is within the period during which the gaming lock is generated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the delay count is performed by using the number of clocks of the sub CPU. However, the delay count according to the gaming machine of the present invention may be performed by using various timers or by subtracting a predetermined value set in the counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are terminated on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART is fixed to "100". However, the "SBB" according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of games to be added to the number of staying games is added (added) to the number of staying games in the "SBB" as in the case of the "BB".

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning number "42" is won, and at the timing when the "rip" of the symbol position "3" is displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2), or the symbol position. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "watermelon" of "14" is displayed, none of the display combinations is established and the mode of "missing" is described. However, instead of this, if the winning number "42" is won and "C_9_SEVN" is not established as the display combination, "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" may be always established as the display combination. For example, this may be realized by adjusting the symbol arrangement of the left reel 3L.
Further, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "rip" of the symbol position "3" is displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L or at the timing when the "watermelon" of the symbol position "14" is displayed. In addition, a display combination that can be established is separately provided, and when the display combination is established, the same processing as when "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" are established. May be done.

Further, when the winning number "42" is won, "C_9_SEVN" is established, and nine medals are paid out, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT game state so as to move away from the execution of ART. May be good. For example, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, it may be shifted to the RT1 gaming state, and when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, it may be shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display command reception processing (see FIG. 116), when the sub-game state is the general state, CZ, the first ART, or the second ART, it is based on the spill bonus lottery table. An embodiment of the bonus lottery process has been described (see S791 and S793 in FIG. 116). However, the sub-game state in which the bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table at the time of spill is performed is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the bonus lottery process based on the spill bonus lottery table may be performed only in the sub-game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, for example, in the general state or CZ.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing a second embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In the pachislot machine of the second embodiment, when "42" is won as the winning number, any display combination of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "9 sheets removed and 1 sheet combination"). The process when (is) is established is different from that of the pachislot machine of the first embodiment. For example, in the pachislot machine of the second embodiment, in the above case, the RT game state is shifted instead of performing the bonus lottery process based on the spilled bonus lottery table. Further, in the RT2 game state, when the 9-card removal 1-card combination is established, the execution of the first ART is determined. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of other points common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

[RT transition table]
First, the RT transition table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119.
Similar to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, the RT transition table shown in FIG. 119 defines the correspondence between the transition conditions of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming states of the transition source and the transition destination. To do.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the RT transition table of the present embodiment, when the display combination (9-card removal 1-card combination) related to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is established in the RT0 game state, the RT game state is changed to the RT1 game. It is stipulated to move to the state.

Further, in the RT transition table of the present embodiment, when the display combination (9-card removal 1-card combination) related to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is established in the RT1 game state, the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state. Is stipulated.

Since the other points of the RT transition table of the present embodiment are the same as those of the RT transition table of the first embodiment (see FIG. 17), description thereof will be omitted here.

[Game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 of the present embodiment will be described.

The main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) in the present embodiment refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 119) and makes a transition between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” as in the first embodiment. Control.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "9-card removal 1-card combination" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state". .. Further, in the "RT1 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "9-card removal 1-card combination" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state".

Since the other points are the same as the transition flow diagram of the RT state (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the processing at the time of receiving the display command in the present embodiment will be described. The display command reception process shown in FIG. 121 is executed by the sub CPU 102 in place of the display command reception process (see FIG. 116) in the first embodiment.

In the display command reception processing shown in FIG. 121, first, the sub CPU 102 uses any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" based on the parameter for specifying the display combination included in the received display command. It is determined whether or not it is displayed (S831). In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that none of the combinations of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S831 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S835.

In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S831 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the RT2 gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is (S832). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT game state is the RT2 game state based on the parameters indicating the RT game state included in the various received commands (for example, display commands). In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S832 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S835.

In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S832 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus distribution lottery process (S833). In the bonus distribution lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on (S834). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S835.

In S835, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination, then ends the process at the time of receiving the display command, and performs the process for the effect content determination process (see FIG. 103). ) S529.

<Operation of the second embodiment>
In the pachislot machine 1 in the second embodiment, when the player has an effect indicating that "42" is a winning number, the player has a left reel 3L "Red 7" in the middle region in the display window 4L. "C_9_SEVN" is established to receive the payout of 9 medals (see FIG. 14), or any of the display combinations of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is established. Whether to receive one medal payout (see FIG. 14) and shift the RT gaming state (when the RT gaming state is RT0 or RT1 gaming state), or to decide to execute the first ART. (When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state), can be selected. That is, the game can be played by arbitrarily selecting whether to immediately receive the payout of a relatively large number of medals or to approach the execution of the first ART. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, since there are a plurality of modes for determining whether or not ART can be executed, the game is diversified as compared with the case where there is only one mode for determining whether or not ART can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

<Modification example>
In the present embodiment, when "42" is won as the winning number and any of the display combinations of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C"("9-card removal 1-card combination") is established, the RT game The mode in which the state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state in the RT0 gaming state and to the RT2 gaming state in the RT1 gaming state has been described. However, instead of this, a new RT state of the migration destination may be provided. For example, an RT5 gaming state in which "18" to "24" may be determined as the winning numbers, which has a relatively low probability, may be newly provided as the transition destination RT gaming state.

In this case, when "18" to "24" are determined as winning numbers in the RT5 game state, the sub CPU 102 tells the player "push order lip C" ("push order lip C" ("push order lip C") depending on the order of stop operations (push order). The combination of the symbols related to "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C") is displayed, and an effect suggesting that the second ART is started is performed. For example, "?" Is displayed in the area corresponding to each reel 3 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the message "The second ART starts with the correct answer in the pressing order" is displayed. Then, when the player's stop operation order is the order in which the combinations of symbols related to "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" can be displayed (see FIG. 48), that is, when the push order is correct. The RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state, and the sub CPU 102 starts the second ART. As a result, the player can immediately receive the payout of a relatively large number of medals (whether to establish "C_9_SEVN" and receive the payout of 9 medals), or shift the RT game state to the RT5 game state. Then, the game can be played by arbitrarily selecting whether to expect the second ART to occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing a third embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 128. In the pachislot machine of the third embodiment, when a predetermined winning number (winning numbers "44" to "46" shown in FIG. 123 described later) is won, a bonus lottery table at the time of display (see FIG. 127 described later). It is different from the pachislot of the first embodiment in that a bonus lottery is performed based on the above. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the common points will be omitted.

[Design combination table]
First, the symbol combination table (No. 4) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The symbol combination tables (No. 1) to (No. 3) in the present embodiment are the same as those tables (FIGS. 12 to 14) in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol combination table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 122 defines a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

As shown in FIG. 122, when "C_C_CH" among the roles related to "cherry" is determined (established) as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out. Since the other points are the same as those of the symbol combination table (No. 4) (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the number of medals to be paid out when "C_C_CH" is determined (established) is not limited to 14, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Internal lottery table for general game status]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. The internal lottery table for the general game state is a table that is referred to in the RT0 game state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning number.

In the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are the winning number "44" (abbreviation "F_left middle stage check") and the winning number "45" (abbreviation "F_middle middle stage check"). ), The winning number "46" (abbreviation "F_right middle stage check") is defined, and the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Is different.

As shown in FIG. 123, "69" to "71" are defined as the data points corresponding to the winning numbers "44" to "46". Further, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state, the probability of winning the winning number "44" (abbreviated as "F_left middle stage check") in setting 6 is 300/65536. Similarly, the probability of winning the winning number "45" (abbreviated as "F_middle-tier che") and the probability of winning the winning number "46" (abbreviated as "F_right middle-tier che") are 300/65536, respectively. become.
Since the other points are the same as those of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state in the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 19, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Internal winning role determination table for small roles / replays]
Next, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table in the present embodiment, in addition to the small winning combination / replay data pointers "1" to "42", the small winning combination / replay data pointers "69" to "71" Is different from the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (FIGS. 25 to 28) in the first embodiment in that the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) are defined. In the present embodiment, the internal winning combination that is won in "1" to "42" of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is the same as that in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the following, only for the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) and (No. 4) related to the winning internal winning combination in the small winning combination / replay data pointers "69" to "71". , FIG. 124 and FIG. 125, and the description of other tables will be omitted.

In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination tables (No. 3) and (No. 4) shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, when "69" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination is obtained. As a result, "C_13_BEL_A", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" and "C_C_CH" are duplicated.

Further, when "70" is acquired as the data pointer for the small combination / replay, "C_13_BEL_B", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L", and "C_C_CH" are duplicated as the internal winning combination.
In addition, when "71" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_13_BEL_C", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L", and "C_C_CH" are duplicated winning combinations.

[Correspondence table between winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 126 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, and shows the types of display combinations that are established according to the stop order. In this correspondence table in the present embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the stop order when the rotation cylinder stop numbers "69" to "71", which will be described later, is also shown, and thus in the first embodiment. It is different from the correspondence table (see FIG. 48). Hereinafter, this difference will be described, and other description will be omitted.

“C_C_CH” is a display role that is not related to the transition of the gaming state, and when “C_C_CH” is established, 15 medals are paid out (see FIG. 122).

In the main ROM 94 of the pachislot machine in this embodiment, a rotation stop number selection table (not shown) corresponding to the rotation stop number selection table in the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 29 is stored. There is. In this rotation cylinder stop number selection table, "69" to "71" are defined as rotation cylinder stop numbers corresponding to "69" to "71" of the small winning combination / replay data pointers.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the rotation stop number is "69" to "71", that is, when "44" to "46" are won as the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointer "69"). (When "71" is acquired), the push order (stop order) is set for the success or failure of the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to the determined internal winning combination (see FIGS. 124 and 125). Has been done.

For example, when "44" is won as the winning number, the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "69", and the rotation stop number is "69", the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is performed. When is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be stopped and displayed.
When the stop order is "middle left / right", "middle right / left", "right / left / middle" or "right / middle / left", the combination of symbols pertaining to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is stopped and displayed. ..

Further, when "45" is won as the winning number, the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "70", and the rotation stop number is "70", the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is performed. When is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be stopped and displayed.
When the stop order is "left middle right", "left and right middle", "right left middle" or "right middle left", the combination of symbols pertaining to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is stopped and displayed. To.

Further, when "46" is won as the winning number, the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "71", and the rotation stop number is "71", the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is performed. When is "right, middle, left," or "right, middle, left," the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be stopped and displayed.
When the stop order is "left middle right", "left / right middle", "middle left / right", or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols pertaining to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is stopped and displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 122, the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is a combination of symbols consisting of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R. "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used. Therefore, for the left reel 3L, if the "cherry" at the symbol position "18" can be stopped in the middle region of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line, the combination of the symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be used. , Can be displayed on the effective line.

In the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which "C_C_CH" can be displayed, the main CPU 93 has the symbol shown in FIG. 11 in the middle region of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line. "Watermelon" at position "14", "Reel" at symbol position "15", "Bell 2" at symbol position "16", "Watermelon" at symbol position "17" and "Cherry" at symbol position "18" When the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of them is displayed, the reel stop control process for stopping the left reel 3L is performed so that the "cherry" of the symbol position "18" is displayed in the middle stage area.

On the other hand, the main CPU 93 has the symbol positions "14" to "18" in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) even when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which "C_C_CH" can be displayed. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing when any of the symbols is displayed, the left reel 3L is stopped so that the symbol related to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is displayed in this middle area. Performs reel stop control processing.

The symbols related to "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" on the left reel 3L are the "rips" of the symbol positions "3", "6", "10", "15", and "20" shown in FIG. (See FIGS. 14 and 15), a number of symbols within the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" is arranged between these symbols. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can stop the left reel 3L so that the symbols related to "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" are displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation for the left reel 3L.

Further, the symbols related to "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" in the middle reel 3C are "bell 1" of the symbol position "1" and symbol positions "6", "9", "14", "19" shown in FIG. "Bell 2" (see FIGS. 14 and 15), and a number of symbols within the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" are arranged between these symbols. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can stop the middle reel 3C so that the symbol corresponding to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation for the middle reel 3C. is there.

The symbols related to "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" on the right reel 3R are "red 7" at the symbol position "18", "white 7" at the symbol position "2", and "19" at the symbol position "19" shown in FIG. "Black BAR", symbol position "9", "10" "white BAR", symbol position "1", "4", "8", "12", "16" "rip", symbol position "6" , "14" (see FIGS. 14 and 15), and a number of symbols within the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" are arranged between these symbols. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can stop the right reel 3R so that the symbol corresponding to any of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation for the right reel 3R. is there.

Further, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which "C_C_CH" cannot be displayed, the main CPU 93 has the symbol position "14" shown in FIG. 11 in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2) constituting the effective line. Even if the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of "18" is displayed, the reel stop control process is performed so that the "cherry" at the symbol position "18" is not displayed in this middle area. .. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when any of the symbol positions "14" to "18" is displayed, the main CPU 93 is the symbol position "C_14_BEL_L" which is a symbol related to "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L". A reel stop control process for stopping the left reel 3L is performed so that the "rip" of "15" or "20" is displayed in the middle area of the display window 4L (see FIG. 2).

The reel stop control process as described above performed by the main CPU 93 is performed by various tables related to the reel stop control process in which the small winning combination / replay data pointers are appropriately set for "69" to "71" (tables shown in FIGS. 30 to 37). It is done using the table corresponding to.

[Bonus lottery table when displayed]
Next, the display bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The display-time bonus lottery table is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and is referred to in the bonus lottery process of FIG. 128, which will be described later. In addition, this display bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus win and the lottery value set according to the internal winning combination related to the symbol combination displayed on the valid line.

In the bonus lottery using the display bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when a combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination "C_C_CH" is displayed on the valid line, "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "no winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. Will be done.
If a combination of symbols related to any of the internal winning combinations "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is displayed on the valid line, the "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 1024/32768 and a probability of 31744/32768. "No win" is decided.

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the processing at the time of receiving the display command of the present embodiment will be described. The display command reception processing shown in FIG. 128 is executed by the sub CPU 102 in this embodiment instead of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 116) in the first embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a general state, CZ, a first ART, or a second ART (S841). In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is neither the general state, the CZ, the first ART, or the second ART (when the determination in S841 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process in S849. Move to.

In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is any of the general state, CZ, the first ART, or the second ART (when the determination in S841 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing. Move to S842. In S842, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number won in the unit game is any of "44" to "46". The winning number can be specified from a parameter that specifies an internal winning combination or the like included in various commands (for example, a start command) transmitted from the main CPU 93 during the unit game.

In S842, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number won in the unit game is any of "44" to "46" (when the determination in S843 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the process to S843. Transfer.

In S843, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display (see FIG. 127). Specifically, based on the parameter for specifying the display combination included in the received display command, it is determined which of the symbols "C_C_CH", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is displayed, and the determination result is obtained. Bonus lottery processing is performed based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display according to. In this bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 first subtracts a random number value extracted from 0 to 32767 with the lottery value. Next, by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred), the bonus winning or no winning is determined. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S846.

In S842, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number won in the unit game is not any of "44" to "46" (when the determination in S842 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the process to S844. Transfer.

In S844, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed based on the parameter specifying the display combination included in the received display command. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S844 that none of the combinations of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S844 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S849.

In S844, when the sub CPU 102 determines that any combination of symbols corresponding to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_C" is displayed (when the determination in S844 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses a spill bonus lottery table (FIG. The bonus lottery process is performed based on (see 54) (S845). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 first subtracts a random number value extracted from 0 to 32767 with a lottery value. Next, by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred), the bonus winning or no winning is determined. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S846.

In S846, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S843 or S845 is a bonus win. In S846, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery result is not a bonus win (when the determination in S846 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S849.

In S846, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery result is a bonus winning (when the determination in S846 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus distribution lottery process (S847). In the bonus distribution lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on (S848). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S849.

In S849, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination, then ends the process at the time of receiving the display command, and performs the process for the effect content determination process (see FIG. 103). ) S529.

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, the effect lottery process in the present embodiment will be described.
When any of "44" to "46" shown in FIG. 123 is determined as the winning number, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning number "44" in the effect number lottery process of S761 in the effect lottery process shown in FIG. 114. -Determine the production number related to the production indicating that any one of "46" is winning, that is, at least "C_C_CH", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" are determined as the internal winning combination.

The effect indicating that any one of "44" to "46" is a winning number is, for example, a symbol related to any one of "C_C_CH", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" depending on the stop order and timing. This is an effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 that the combination of the above can be displayed on the effective line before and during the stop operation of the player. When the effect is executed, for example, "?" Is displayed in the area corresponding to each reel 3 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the message "cherry or bell" is displayed in the center of the screen. Will be done.
Since the other points of the effect lottery process are the same as those of the effect lottery process in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When such an effect is performed, the bonus winning is determined with a relatively high probability (1/2 in this embodiment) when the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed on the effective line. The grasping player can select the stop order and perform the stop operation in the expectation that the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" will be displayed on the effective line.

<Operation of the third embodiment>
Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described.
Conventionally, in various lottery related to ART based on the internal winning combination (for example, lottery related to whether ART can be executed or lottery related to so-called addition), the probability of a lottery result favorable to the player is set relatively high. A gaming machine that defines a so-called rare role, which is an internal winning combination, is known (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-24292). However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-24292, the winning probability of the so-called rare role is set to be relatively low, so that the player wins the rare role and various lottery related to ART. It is difficult to have a great expectation for obtaining a favorable lottery result. As a result, there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined, the sub CPU 103 wins any of the winning numbers "44" to "46". That is, an effect indicating that at least "C_C_CH" and "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" are determined as the internal winning combination is performed.

Further, in the display-time bonus lottery table (see FIG. 127) referred to in the bonus lottery process (S843 in FIG. 128) performed when the winning numbers "44" to "46" are determined, " The lottery value when the combination of the symbols relating to "C_C_CH" or "C_14_BEL (" C_14_BEL_A "to" C_14_BEL_L ")" is displayed is specified. Further, the lottery value (16384) related to the bonus winning when the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed is the lottery value (1024) related to the bonus winning when the combination of symbols related to "C_14_BEL" is displayed. Compared to, a relatively high value is set. That is, in the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed, the bonus winning is determined with a relatively high probability (1/2 in the present embodiment).

In addition, when the winning number "44" is determined and the stop operation is performed in the stop order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is stopped on the valid line. It can be displayed (see the number "69" for stopping the rotation of the cylinder in FIG. 126). In addition, when the winning number "45" is determined and the stop operation is performed in the stop order of "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. It is possible (see the number "70" for stopping the rotation of the cylinder in FIG. 126). In addition, when the winning number "46" is determined and the stop operation is performed in the stop order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is stopped on the valid line. It can be displayed (see the number "71" for stopping the rotation of the cylinder in FIG. 126). That is, when any one of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined as the winning number, the combination of the symbols related to "C_C_CH" has two predetermined stopping orders out of the six stopping orders. When selected, the stop display can be displayed on the valid line. Therefore, when any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined as the winning number, the probability that the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be stopped and displayed on the valid line is 1/3. ..

Further, since the probability that the winning number "44" is determined as the winning number is 300/65536 (see FIG. 123), the probability that the winning number "44" is determined as the winning number and "C_C_CH" can be displayed. Is (300 × 1/3) / 65536, that is, 100/65536. Further, the probability that the winning number "45" is determined as the winning number and "C_C_CH" can be displayed, and the probability that the winning number "46" is determined as the winning number and "C_C_CH" can be displayed are also Similarly, it becomes 100/65536 respectively. That is, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery process is performed in which any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined, "C_C_CH" is displayed, and the bonus winning is determined with a probability of 1/2. The probability of being struck is 300/65536.

Here, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-24292, the probability of a lottery result favorable to the player is set relatively high in various lottery related to ART, but the winning probabilities are compared. The case where the winning number related to the internal winning combination, which is set to be low, is set instead of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is compared with the present embodiment. Specifically, instead of the winning numbers "44" to "46", a winning number is set in which the bonus lottery process, which is a bonus winning with a probability of 1/2 when determined, is always performed, and the winning number is concerned. A case where the probability that is determined is set to 300/65536 is taken as a comparative example.
In the present embodiment and the comparative example, the probability that the bonus lottery process in which the bonus winning is determined with a probability of 1/2 is performed is equal to 300/65536. However, in the present embodiment, the player has a probability of 900/65536 (the probability that any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined), and the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is placed on the effective line. It is possible to give an opportunity to select a predetermined stop order that can be displayed. If the player can select a predetermined stop order at this given opportunity, a bonus lottery process for winning a bonus is performed with a probability of 1/2. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as compared with the comparative example, the player has a higher expectation that the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed on the effective line. Therefore, the player plays the game while having a great expectation that the combination of the symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed on the effective line and the lottery result which is advantageous in the lottery related to ART is obtained. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be displayed on the effective line when the cherry at the symbol position "18" stops on the effective line for the left reel 3L. For those who want to stop the left reel 3L, it will be more interesting.

<Modification example>
In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed on the valid line in the bonus lottery process (see S843 in FIG. 128) based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display (see FIG. 127), at the time of display. The mode in which the bonus lottery is performed by the lottery value related to "C_C_CH" of the bonus lottery table has been described. However, instead of this, if the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the rare combination that is the bonus winning can be displayed with a relatively high probability, even if the combination of symbols related to the rare combination cannot be displayed on the valid line. , You may perform a bonus lottery that will be a bonus winning with a relatively high probability. That is, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be displayed on the effective line, the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" is displayed even if it cannot be displayed on the effective line. When the bonus lottery is performed, the lottery value related to "C_C_CH" in the bonus lottery table may be used for the bonus lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, either of the symbol combinations related to "C_C_CH" or "C_14_BEL" of the internal winning combination to be duplicated is displayed according to the stop order, and is displayed based on the displayed symbol combinations. The mode in which the bonus lottery is performed using the hour bonus lottery table (see FIG. 127) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of internal winning combinations related to the combination of symbols to be displayed according to the overlapping winning and stopping order may be set, or the types may be changed. For example, in addition to "C_C_CH" or "C_14_BEL", "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to "watermelon" may be added as a rare role. In this case, in the display bonus lottery table, depending on whether or not the bonus is won and "C_C_CH", "C_14_BEL" and "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" as internal winning roles related to the symbol combination displayed on the valid line. The lottery value set in the above is specified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined two stop orders are selected from the six stop orders, the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, and "C_C_CH". When the combination of the symbols related to the above is displayed on the effective line, the mode in which the bonus lottery process, which is the bonus winning, is performed with a relatively high probability has been described. However, instead of this, the number of stop orders in which the combination of symbols related to the rare role that is a bonus winning with a relatively high probability can be displayed on the effective line may be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a predetermined one of the six stop orders, a predetermined four of the six stop orders, or six of the six stop orders.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of the winning numbers "44" to "46" is determined as the winning number, the symbol related to the rare role ("C_C_CH") which becomes the bonus winning with a relatively high probability. The mode in which the probability that the stop order in which the combination can be displayed on the valid line is selected is set to 1/3 has been described. Further, in the same case, the mode in which the probability of selecting the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to other rare combinations (“C_14_BEL”) can be displayed on the effective line is set to 2/3 has been described. However, instead of this, these probabilities may be set to be equal. For example, so that all of these probabilities are halved, that is, the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be displayed on the effective line is "left middle right", "left and right middle", and "middle". Set "Left and Right", and set the stop order that can display the combination of symbols related to other rare roles "C_14_BEL" on the effective line as "Middle Right Left", "Right Left Middle", and "Right Middle Left". May be good.

Further, as described above, when the number of internal winning combinations related to the combination of symbols to be displayed according to the stop order is set to 3 or more, for example, "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to "watermelon" are rare. When added as a combination, the probability that the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to each rare combination can be displayed on the effective line is selected may be set differently. For example, the above probabilities for "C_C_CH" are set to 1/6, the above probabilities for "C_14_BEL" are set to 2/6, and the above probabilities for "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to "watermelon" are set to 3/6. You may.

In addition, although the number and types of internal winning combinations related to the combination of symbols to be displayed according to the stop order are the same, there is a probability that the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to each internal winning combination can be displayed on the effective line is selected. Winning numbers different from each other may be set. In this case, for example, the winning numbers "47" to "49" are set separately from the winning numbers "44" to "46". Further, "72" to "74" are defined as data points corresponding to the winning numbers "47" to "49". In addition, when "72" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, "C_13_BEL_D", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" and It is specified that "C_C_CH" is duplicated. Further, in the same table, when "73" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_13_BEL_E", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" and "C_C_CH" are duplicated as internal winning combinations. Prescribed in. Further, in the same table, when "74" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_13_BEL_F", "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" and "C_C_CH" are duplicated as internal winning combinations. Prescribed in. Then, when any one of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "72" to "74" is acquired, there is a probability that the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be displayed on the valid line is selected. Set the stop order in which "C_C_CH" and "C_14_BEL" can be displayed so as to be 2/3. For example, when "74" is acquired as the data pointer for small role / replay, the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to "C_C_CH" can be displayed on the valid line is "left middle right", "left and right middle". , "Middle left and right" and "Middle right left", and set the stop order in which "C_14_BEL" can be displayed to "Right left middle" and "Right middle left".

In addition, it is not necessary to perform an effect indicating that the winning numbers (in this embodiment, the winning numbers "44" to "46") for which the bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display is determined to be performed have been won. .. During ART, in most unit games, the stop order is notified to the player using the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speakers 20L and 20R. Therefore, even if the above effect is not performed, the player can infer that the winning number that determines that the bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display is won is won because the stop order is not notified. is there. That is, the absence of notification of the stop order can be a substitute for the above effect.

In addition, there is a relatively high probability that the winning number (in this embodiment, the winning numbers "44" to "46"), which is determined to be the bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display, has been won. You may perform an effect that suggests the number of stop orders that can display the combination of symbols related to the rare combination that is the bonus winning on the effective line, or the probability that the stop order can be selected. For example, the liquid crystal display device 11 can display "C_C_CH" on the effective line in two predetermined stop orders out of the six stop orders, or the probability that the stop order can be selected is 1. An effect of displaying a message to the effect that it is / 3 may be performed.

In addition, when the predetermined conditions are met (for example, winning a lottery), there is a relatively high probability that the winning number, which is determined to be a bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display, has been won. The liquid crystal display device 11 or the speakers 20L, 20R may notify the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to the rare combination (“C_C_CH” in this embodiment), which is a bonus winning combination, can be displayed on the effective line. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speaker indicate the stop order in which the combination of symbols related to the rare role (“C_14_BEL” in this actual embodiment), which is a rare role that is a bonus winning with a relatively high probability, can be displayed on the effective line. It may be notified by 20L, 20R.

In addition, when a plurality of winning numbers having different types of internal winning combinations related to the combination of symbols that can be displayed according to the stop order are set, and if these winning numbers are won, a bonus lottery based on the bonus lottery table at the time of display is used. When performing the above, the sub CPU 102 may perform an effect suggesting that these winning numbers have been won.

For example, in addition to the winning numbers "44" to "46", the internal winning combination related to the combination of symbols that can be displayed according to the stop order may be "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" (hereinafter, simply referred to as "watermelon"). Yes) and the winning numbers "50" to "52" which are "C_C_CH" are set. For each of the winning numbers "50" to "52", the combination of any of the symbols "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" and "C_C_CH" can be set so that the stop order that can be displayed on the valid line is different when the winning is won. Has been done.

In addition, a first effect is prepared, which is an effect that is executed only when any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" and "50" to "52" is won. The first effect is an effect of displaying the message "watermelon or cherry or bell" on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 and displaying "?" In the area corresponding to each reel 3 at the lower part of the screen. In this first effect, neither stop order is notified. The first effect is an effect indicating that a display combination related to cherry, a display combination related to watermelon, or a display combination related to bell can be established depending on the stop order. That is, depending on the stop order, the winning numbers "44" to "46" that can establish "C_C_CH" related to the cherry or "C_14_BEL" related to the bell as the display combination, and "C_C_CH" related to the cherry Or "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to watermelon can be said to be an effect suggesting that the winning numbers "50" to "52" have been won.

In addition, a second effect is prepared, which is an effect that is executed only when any of the winning numbers "50" to "52" is won. The second effect is an effect of displaying the message "watermelon or cherry" on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 and displaying "?" In the area corresponding to each reel 3 at the lower part of the screen. In this second effect, neither stop order is notified. The second effect is an effect indicating that a display combination related to cherry or a display combination related to watermelon can be established depending on the stop order. That is, depending on the stop order, "50" to "52", which are winning numbers capable of establishing "C_C_CH" related to cherry or "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" related to watermelon, are won as display combinations. It can be said that it is a production that suggests.

If any of the winning numbers "44" to "46" and "50" to "52" is won and the first effect is executed, the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3C or the right before the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed. If the player who has performed the stop operation on the reel 3R does not display the symbol related to "watermelon" on the effective line, the winning numbers "44" to "46" are winning, or the winning number " It can be grasped that "50" to "52" were won and the stop operation could not be performed in the stop order in which the "watermelon" can be stopped. However, at this point, if the winning numbers "44" to "46" are winning, there is a possibility that "C_14_BEL" will be established. Therefore, the player cannot specify whether "C_C_CH" is established or "C_14_BEL" is established as the display combination. Therefore, until the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the player is made to maintain the expectation that the display combination (“C_C_CH” in the present embodiment) that is relatively advantageous to the player is established. At the same time, it is possible to play a game.

Further, when any of the winning numbers "50" to "52" is won and the second effect is executed, the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is subjected to the stop operation for the left reel 3L. If the symbol related to "watermelon" is not displayed on the effective line, the player who has performed the stop operation can establish "C_C_CH" as a display combination even before performing the third stop operation. Can be grasped. That is, at this point, the player can grasp that a display combination (“C_C_CH” in the present embodiment) that is relatively advantageous for the player can be established. Therefore, the timing at which the display combination that can be established can be specified changes depending on whether the second effect is executed or not.

By doing the above, it is possible to prevent the effect of allowing the player to select a stop order in which a relatively advantageous display combination can be established (the so-called "push order hit" effect) from becoming monotonous, and to promote the game. Can be enhanced.

As described above, the sub CPU 102 determines the production mode by lottery. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect can be executed, these effects are not always executed.
In addition, in order to stop the symbol related to "watermelon", it is recommended to stop the middle reel 3C at the timing when "red 7" of symbol position "13" is displayed on the effective line. Is preferable. Further, for the right reel 3R, it is preferable that the stop operation is recommended at the timing when "white 7" of the symbol position "2" is displayed on the effective line.
Further, the lottery values of "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" in the display bonus lottery table may be set to different values from the lottery values of "C_C_CH" and "C_14_BEL", or the same value as any of the lottery values. May be set to. Further, the internal winning combination that overlaps with "C_CD_WML_A" to "C_CD_WML_F" (watermelon) may be changed to "C_14_BEL" instead of "C_C_CH". In this case, in the second effect, the message "watermelon or bell" is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 11.
Further, the execution timings of the first effect and the second effect can be arbitrarily set, but the second effect is after the player operates the start lever 16 and before the first stop operation, or after the first stop operation. It is preferable to set it before the stop operation.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachislot machine, which is a gaming machine showing a fourth embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. In the pachislot machine of the fourth embodiment, the sub-game state is the notification of the stop order to the player using the liquid crystal display device 11 and the speakers 20L, 20R in the second ART (hereinafter, "push order navigation" in the present embodiment. It is different from the pachislot of the first embodiment in that it gives a privilege related to the extension of the second ART state based on whether or not the player has obeyed. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the common points will be omitted.

[Push order privilege lottery table]
First, the push order privilege lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The push order privilege lottery table is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76, and is referred to in the privilege lottery process of the display command reception processing of the present embodiment described later with reference to FIG. 130 (see S866 of FIG. 130 described later). To. In this push order privilege lottery table, the correspondence between the number of additional Gs and the lottery value set according to the number of additional Gs is defined.

In the privilege lottery process using the push order privilege lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the privilege lottery process using the push order privilege lottery table, "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 15568/32768, and "10" is determined with a probability of 10000/32768, and 6000/32768. "20" is determined as the "number of additional games" with the probability of. Further, "30" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "50" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768. In addition, "100" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 100/32768, "200" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 75/32768, and "number of additional games" is determined with a probability of 25/32768. "300" is determined. Then, the determined value of the "additional game number" is added to the ART game number counter.

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the processing at the time of receiving the display command of this embodiment will be described. The display command reception processing shown in FIG. 130 is executed by the sub CPU 102 in place of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 116) in the first embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the second ART (S851). When it is determined in S851 that it is not the second ART (when the determination in S851 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S858.

In S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the second ART (when the determination in S851 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not push order navigation has occurred in the unit game. Determine (S852). In S852, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation generation flag stored in the push order navigation flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. This push order navigation generation flag is set on by the sub CPU 102 when the sub CPU 102 decides to perform an effect accompanied by the push order navigation, and is turned off at the start of the next unit game (when the start command is received). Is set to. When the push order navigation generation flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order navigation has occurred, and when it is off, the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order navigation has not occurred.

In S852, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order navigation has not occurred (when the determination in S852 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S858.

In S852, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order navigation has occurred (YES in S852), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has followed the push order navigation (S853).
In S853, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation confirmation flag stored in the push order navigation confirmation flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. This push order navigation confirmation flag is when the stop operation related to the received stop command is performed in the order of the generated push order navigation based on the content of the stop command received after the push order navigation is generated. Is set to on by the sub CPU 102, and is set to off if not done. The push order navigation confirmation flag is set to off at the start of the next unit game (when a start command is received).
When the push order navigation confirmation flag is ON, the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has followed the push order navigation (the stop operation has been performed according to the push order navigation). On the other hand, when the push order navigation confirmation flag is off, the sub CPU 102 determines that the player did not follow the push order navigation (the stop operation was not performed according to the push order navigation).

In S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player does not follow the push order navigation (when the determination in S853 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S857.

In S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has followed the push order navigation (YES in S853), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the push order counter (S854). The push order counter is provided in the sub RAM 103.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the push order counter has reached a predetermined value (S855). In this embodiment, "20" is set as a predetermined value.

In S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the push order counter has not reached a predetermined value (when the determination in S855 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S858.

In S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the push order counter has reached a predetermined value (when the determination in S855 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the privilege lottery process based on the push order privilege lottery table (FIG. 129). (S856). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 first subtracts the random number values extracted from 0 to 32767 with the lottery values of the push order privilege lottery table. Next, the number of additional Gs is determined by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined additional G number to the ART game number counter, and shifts the processing to S857.

In S857, the sub CPU 102 clears the push order counter (sets the value to "0"). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S858. The push order counter is cleared when S853 is determined to be NO, after the processing of S856, and when the second ART ends.

Since the processes of S858 to S864 are the same as the processes of S791 to S797 of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 116) in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

<Operation of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described.
Conventionally, a gaming machine that shifts to an ART gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied has been known (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-78453). In this ART gaming state, the correct push order (predetermined stop order) is notified at the time of winning the bell, that is, the so-called push order bell, which wins a prize by the correct answer of the push order (stop operation according to the predetermined stop order). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-78453, the player will vaguely repeat the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer notified in the game in the ART gaming state. Therefore, the player loses the tension for the game, feels the game monotonously, and there is a risk that the interest of the game is lowered for the player.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the sub-game state is the second ART, the push order is notified, and the player follows the push order navigation (stop operation according to the push order navigation). When the number of unit games (played) reaches a predetermined value ("20") without sandwiching a unit game in which the push order is notified but the player does not follow the push order navigation, the sub CPU 102 pushes the game. The privilege lottery process using the order privilege lottery table is performed. In the privilege lottery process using the push order privilege lottery table, the number of additional games is drawn (lottery for the number of additional games), and the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, when the sub CPU 102 continuously determines that the stop operation has been performed according to the push order navigation a predetermined number of times, the lottery relating to the extension of the second ART period (increase in the number of ART games), which is advantageous for the player. Is done.

As a result, the player who wants to increase the number of ART games and continue the advantageous second ART for a long time should be careful not to perform the stop operation in an order different from the stop order notified by the push order navigation. Perform a stop operation. For this reason, the tension for the game is increased, and the player can continue the game without feeling monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game.

<Modification example>
In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is the second ART, the push order is notified, and the number of unit games according to the push order navigation by the player reaches a predetermined value, the sub CPU 102 Explained how the privilege lottery process is performed using the push order privilege lottery table. However, not limited to this, when the sub-game state is the first ART, the push order is notified, and the number of unit games according to the push order navigation by the player reaches a predetermined value. The sub CPU 102 may perform the privilege lottery process using the push order privilege lottery table.

Moreover, the above-mentioned predetermined value can be changed as appropriate. For example, a predetermined value may be set to "30".

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order privilege lottery table is used by the sub CPU 102 as a privilege when the push order is notified and the number of unit games according to the push order navigation reaches a predetermined value. The mode in which the privilege lottery process was performed was explained. However, instead of this, as a privilege, a BR lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift the sub-game state to "BR", which is a sub-game state in which the addition of the number of ART games can be expected with a high probability. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 performs the privilege lottery process for determining the number of additional games using the push order privilege lottery table has been described. However, instead of this, a lottery process related to the so-called addition of the number of sets may be performed by setting a predetermined number of games, for example, "50" games as one set and adding the games in units of the number of sets.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order counter is cleared (S857) when the privilege lottery process (S856) is performed in the display command reception process (see FIG. 130) or when the second ART ends. Aspects have been described. However, instead of this, in either case or both cases, the sub CPU 102 may hold the value of the push order counter without clearing the push order counter.
When holding the value of the push order counter, set this predetermined value in a plurality of stages when determining whether or not the value of the push order counter has reached the predetermined value in the processing at the time of receiving the display command (S855). Is preferable. For example, the predetermined values may be set to "20", "50", "70", and "100". In this case, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S855 that the value of the push order counter has reached one predetermined value, the predetermined value to be compared with the push order counter in subsequent S855 is one step higher than the one predetermined value. Change to a larger predetermined value. For example, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the predetermined value has reached "20", the sub CPU 102 sets the predetermined value to be compared with the push order counter to "50" in the subsequent S855. Further, a push order privilege lottery table corresponding to each predetermined value set in a plurality of stages may be provided, and a push order privilege lottery table corresponding to a relatively large predetermined value corresponds to a relatively small predetermined value. The lottery value of each push order privilege lottery table may be set so that the number of additional Gs having a larger value than the push order privilege lottery table is determined with a higher probability.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 performs the privilege lottery process based on the number of times the player follows the push order navigation has been described. However, instead of this, the privilege lottery process may be performed based on the period according to the push order navigation (the period including the game in which the push order navigation did not occur) during ART. For example, a counter is provided that counts up for each unit game during ART regardless of whether or not push order navigation occurs, and is cleared when push order navigation occurs and the push order navigation is not followed. , The sub CPU 102 may perform the privilege lottery process when the counter reaches a predetermined value.
In addition, during the game until the counter reaches a predetermined value, for example, when the predetermined value is "20", the number of push order navigations that occurred during the last 20 unit games (units in which push order navigations occurred). The content of the privilege may be changed according to the number of games). For example, when the number of push order navigation is "1 to 5", a BR lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the sub-game state to "BR", and the number of push order navigation is "6 to 10". In this case, the privilege lottery process using the push order privilege lottery table (see FIG. 129) may be performed. Further, the lottery value of the push order privilege lottery table (see FIG. 129) may be changed according to the number of times of the push order navigation generated during the game until the counter reaches a predetermined value. For example, when the number of push order navigation is "6 to 10", the privilege lottery process is performed while maintaining the lottery value specified in the push order privilege lottery table (see FIG. 129), and the number of push order navigation is increased. In the case of a relatively small number of "1 to 5", the lottery value of this privilege lottery table is changed so that a large value is added to the G number with a relatively high probability, and the privilege lottery is based on the changed lottery value. Processing may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of clearing the push order counter (S857) when the push order navigation is not followed (when S853 of the display command reception processing shown in FIG. 130 is NO determination) has been described. However, instead of clearing the push order counter, the sub CPU 102 may subtract the value of the push order counter by a predetermined value.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing a fifth embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the pachislot machine of the fifth embodiment, whether the sub-game state is to maintain the state in which the number of ART games is added in the second ART, or to add a predetermined number of games instead of abandoning the opportunity to add. Is different from the pachislot of the first embodiment in that the player can arbitrarily select. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the common points will be omitted.

[Production content determination process]
First, with reference to FIG. 131, the effect content determination process of the present embodiment will be described. The effect content determination process shown in FIG. 131 is executed by the sub CPU 102 in place of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 103) in the first embodiment. Since the contents of the processes of S871 to S886 in the effect content determination process of the present embodiment are the same as the contents of the processes of S521 to S536 in the effect content determination process of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here.

In S885, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S885 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S887. In S887, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input command is received (S887). In the present embodiment, the input command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 when the player presses down the enter button 28 or the select button 29 (see FIG. 2).

In S887, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input command is not received (NO in S887), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 102). Move to S515.

On the other hand, in S887, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input command is received (YES in S887), the sub CPU 102 performs the input command reception process (S888). The details of the input command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 described later. After the processing of S888, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when receiving input command]
The input command reception processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. The input command reception processing shown in FIG. 132 is executed by the sub CPU 102 when the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is an input command.

In the input command reception processing, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether or not the sub game state is the second ART (S881). When it is determined in S881 that it is not the second ART (when the determination in S881 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S885.

In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the second ART (when the determination in S881 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input is related to the additional cut (S882). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 is an input related to the additional cut when a specific screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the operation content indicated by the input command is the content related to a predetermined operation. To determine.
Here, the specific screen is a screen displayed when the player presses down the select button 29 when the sub-game state is the second ART, and the state in which the addition is performed is maintained or the addition is performed. Instead of abandoning the opportunity, it is configured to include items corresponding to the options so that a predetermined number of games can be added or selected. The items corresponding to the options are displayed in the form of buttons, for example. When a specific screen is displayed, the player uses the select button 29 and the enter button 28 to select an item displayed in the shape of a button corresponding to any option.
Further, the predetermined operation here is an operation of the enter button 28 relating to the confirmation of the selection of the item corresponding to the option of adding a predetermined number of games instead of abandoning the opportunity to add.

In S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input is not related to the additional cut (when the determination in S882 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S885.

In S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the input is related to the additional cut (when the determination in S882 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the additional cut flag (S883). Here, the additional cut flag is a flag stored in the additional cut flag storage area of the sub RAM 103, and is set to off when the sub-game state shifts from the second ART to another sub-game state.

Next, in S884, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART remaining game number change process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 calculates the number of additional games calculated by multiplying the value of the ART game number counter by a predetermined coefficient, and adds the calculated number of additional games to the value of the ART game number counter.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined coefficient is set in advance based on the expected value of the number of games to be added when the game is played until the value of the ART game number counter becomes 0. Therefore, when the predetermined coefficient is set to "0.3" and the value of the ART game number counter is "100", "30" is calculated as the number of additional games, and the calculated addition is calculated. The number of games is added to the value of the ART game number counter, and the value of the ART game number counter becomes "130". In addition, in this embodiment, this predetermined coefficient is set in consideration of the fact that additional additions occur in the number of games added.
Further, in the process of changing the number of remaining ART games, when the value of the number of additional games counter is "1" or more, the value is added to the value of the number of ART games counter and the value of the number of additional games counter is cleared.
Then, after the processing of S884, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the input command.

When S881 is a NO determination or S882 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines and executes an effect according to the input (S885). For example, when a specific screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the player operates the enter button 28 for confirming the selection of the item for maintaining the state in which the addition is performed (S882 determines NO). In the case of), the sub CPU 102 ends the display of the specific screen, and displays the screen displayed before displaying the specific screen on the liquid crystal display device 11.
Then, after the processing of S885, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the input command.

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, the process at the time of receiving the start command of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The start command reception process shown in FIG. 133 is executed by the sub CPU 102 in place of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104) in the first embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is in progress (S891). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress (when the determination in S891 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus in-process (S892). Since the pseudo-bonus processing in S892 is the same as the content of the pseudo-bonus processing in the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 105, the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, in S891, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not in progress (when the determination in S891 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (S893). .. During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S893 that it is not in ART (second ART) (when the determination in S893 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S898.

In S893, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is in progress (when the determination in S893 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the additional cut flag stored in the additional cut flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. Determines whether or not is on (S894).

In S894, when the sub CU 102 determines that the additional cut flag is not on (NO in S894), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during ART (S895). Since the processing during ART of S895 is the same as the content of the processing during ART in the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 106, the description thereof is omitted here. After the processing of S895, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S899.

In S894, when the sub CU 102 determines that the addition cut flag is on (when the determination in S894 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets various flags related to the addition during the second ART to off, and also Various counters related to the addition are set to 0 (S895). Here, the various flags are, for example, a BR flag, a BR continuation flag, and an additional addition flag, and the various counters related to the addition are an additional addition game number counter and a BR game number counter. By this process, the states of the various flags and the counter values in the second ART of this time are not inherited in the next second ART to be executed after the second ART of this time is completed. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the ART game number counter by "1" (S897). After the processing of S897, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S899.

The subsequent processes S898 to S901 are the same as S545-S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 104) in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

<Operation of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery related to an extension of the period for performing "AT" or "ART", a so-called additional lottery, while performing "AT" or "ART". For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-91406, when a specific combination (small combination related to "bell") is won in the "pseudo-bonus" (ART state), the number of remaining unit games in the game period of the "ART state" is used. A game machine that performs an additional lottery for a certain number of ART games is described.
However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-91406, an additional lottery is performed near the closing time of the game store, and as a result, the number of ART games clearly exceeds the number of unit games that can be played by the closing time. The addition may be decided. In this case, the player feels as if he / she has lost the number of ART games that cannot be digested (cannot be played), and the additional lottery that should be originally pleasing to the player feels unpleasant, and the interest of the game is reduced for the player. There is a risk of doing so.

In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is BR, which is the second ART or the sub-game state in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is expected, when the player inputs the additional cut, the sub CPU 102 Calculates the number of additional games calculated by multiplying the value of the ART game number counter by a predetermined coefficient, and adds the calculated number of additional games to the value of the ART game number counter (change of the number of remaining ART games in S884 in FIG. 132). processing). Further, in the start command reception processing (see FIG. 133) executed thereafter, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional cut flag set to be turned on when the input related to the additional cut is performed, and the additional flag is turned on. In the case of, the processing during ART (see FIG. 106) including the processing related to the addition of the number of games (for example, S583 in FIG. 106) is not performed. On the other hand, when the addition flag is off, the processing during ART including the processing related to the addition of the number of games is performed. That is, the player can arbitrarily select whether to maintain the state in which the number of ART games is added, or to add a predetermined number of games instead of abandoning the opportunity to add the number of ART games.

Therefore, when the closing time of the game store is near, the player may obtain the addition of the predetermined number of games by choosing to add the predetermined number of games instead of abandoning the opportunity of the addition. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of ART games that exceeds the number of unit games that can be played by the closing time of business is determined to be added frequently. As a result, it is possible to suppress making the additional lottery, which should be originally pleasing to the player, unpleasant, and it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, instead of abandoning the opportunity for addition, the player can arbitrarily select whether to add a predetermined number of games, so that the playability according to the intention of the player can be provided. Can be done. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification example>
In the present embodiment, when the player inputs the additional cut, the sub CPU 102 calculates the number of additional games by multiplying the value of the ART game number counter by a predetermined coefficient, and calculates the calculated number of additional games as the number of ART games. An aspect of adding to the value of the counter (processing for changing the number of remaining ART games in S884 in the processing at the time of receiving the input command in FIG. 132) has been described. However, the method of determining the number of additional games can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of additional games may be determined by lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the input command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 when the enter button 28 or the select button 29 is operated has been described. However, instead of this, the enter button 28 and the select button 29 may be connected to the sub control circuit 101 without going through the main control circuit 91. In this case, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input related to the additional cut is performed based on the output from the enter button 28 or the select button 29 (from the sensor connected to these buttons (not shown)).

The gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L ... Left display window, 4C ... Middle display window, 4R … Right display window, 11… LCD display device, 16… Start lever, 17L… Left stop button, 17C… Middle stop button, 17R… Right stop button, 91… Main control circuit, 93… Main CPU, 101… Sub control circuit , 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (2)

A start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means that is composed of a plurality of display columns and that displays a symbol in a variable manner according to the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for the plurality of display columns by the player, and a stop operation detecting means.
A stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means.
A notification means for notifying the stop order, which is the order of stop operations for the plurality of display columns for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
It is possible to notify the stop order by the notification means, and a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous for the player.
An extension determination means for making an extension decision, which is a determination relating to the extension of the predetermined gaming state during the predetermined gaming state,
An extension execution means capable of extending the predetermined gaming state according to the result of the extension determination, and
In the predetermined gaming state, the extension determination suppressing means for suppressing the extension determination by the extension determination means, and the extension determination suppressing means.
Predetermined information storage means capable of storing predetermined information regarding suppression of the extension decision by the extension decision suppressing means, and
With
The extension determination suppressing means can suppress the extension determination in the next and subsequent games when an arbitrary selection is made by the player in the game and a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The predetermined condition includes that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means and that the extension decision is made by the extension determination means.
The predetermined information is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is cleared when the gaming state is changed from the predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. The predetermined information storage means further includes a predetermined information determining means for determining whether or not the predetermined information is stored.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined information determining means makes a determination for each unit game during the predetermined gaming state.

Images